VMG5313-B10B V5.11

VMG5313-BXB Series
Wireless N VDSL2 IAD with USB
Version 5.11
Edition 1, 01/2016
Quick Start Guide
User’s Guide
Default Login Details

LAN IP Address http://192.168.1.1
Login admin, user
www.zyxel.com
Password 1234, user
Copyright © 2016 ZyXEL Communications Corporation

IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in
your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure
that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the VMG and get up and running right away.
• More Information
Go to support.zyxel.com to find other information on the VMG.
VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide
2
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................15
Introducing the VMG ...............................................................................................................................17

The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................23
Quick Start ...............................................................................................................................................31
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................33
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................55
Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................57

Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................62
Wireless ..................................................................................................................................................90
Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................120
Routing ..................................................................................................................................................136
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................142
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................160
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................176
IGMP/MLD ............................................................................................................................................179
Vlan Group ............................................................................................................................................182
Interface Grouping ................................................................................................................................184
USB Service ..........................................................................................................................................189
Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................194
MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................................202
Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................204
Scheduler Rule ......................................................................................................................................208
Certificates ............................................................................................................................................210
Voice .....................................................................................................................................................217
Log .......................................................................................................................................................248
Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................................251
VoIP Status ...........................................................................................................................................254
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................256
Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................258
Multicast Status ....................................................................................................................................260
xDSL Statistics ......................................................................................................................................262
3G Statistics .........................................................................................................................................265
System ..................................................................................................................................................267
User Account .........................................................................................................................................268
Remote Management ............................................................................................................................270
SNMP ....................................................................................................................................................273
Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................275
3
Contents Overview
E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................277

Log Setting ...........................................................................................................................................279
Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................282
Backup Restore .....................................................................................................................................285
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................288
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................293
Appendices ......................................................................................................................................300
4
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 15
Chapter 1
Introducing the VMG ..........................................................................................................................17
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................17

1.2 Ways to Manage the VMG ................................................................................................................17
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the VMG .................................................................................................17
1.4 Applications for the VMG .................................................................................................................18
1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................18
1.4.2 VMG’s USB Support ................................................................................................................18
1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................19
1.6 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................21
1.7 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................21
1.7.1 Using the Wi-Fi and WPS Buttons ...........................................................................................21
Chapter 2
The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................23
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................23

2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................23
2.2 Web Configurator Layout ..................................................................................................................25
2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................25
2.2.2 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................26
Chapter 3
Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................31
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31

3.2 Quick Start Setup ..............................................................................................................................31
Chapter 4
Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................33
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................33

4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection ..........................................................................................33
4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................36
4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................36
5
Table of Contents
4.3.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................37

4.3.3 Without WPS ...........................................................................................................................41
4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ................................................................................................42
4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................45
4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ........................................................................................47
4.7 Access the VMG Using DDNS ..........................................................................................................51
4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ..................................................................51
4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your VMG .............................................................................................52
4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................52
4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter ..................................................................................................52
4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ....................................................................................53
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 55
Chapter 5
Network Map and Status Screens .....................................................................................................57
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................57

5.2 The Network Map Screen .................................................................................................................57
5.3 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................58
Chapter 6
Broadband...........................................................................................................................................62
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................62

6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................62
6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................63
6.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................66
6.2 The Broadband Screen .....................................................................................................................66
6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ...................................................................................................68
6.3 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................76
6.4 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................80
6.5 The Ethernet WAN Screen ................................................................................................................82
6.6 The 802.1x Screen ............................................................................................................................83
6.6.1 Modify 802.1X Settings ............................................................................................................84
6.7 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................84
Chapter 7
Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................90
7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................90

7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................90
7.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................90
7.2 The General Screen .........................................................................................................................91
6
Table of Contents
7.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................93

7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................93
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................94
7.3 The Guest/More AP Screen ..............................................................................................................95
7.3.1 Edit Guest/More AP ................................................................................................................96
7.4 MAC Authentication ..........................................................................................................................98
7.5 The WPS Screen ..............................................................................................................................99
7.6 The WMM Screen ...........................................................................................................................101
7.7 The WDS Screen ............................................................................................................................102
7.7.1 WDS Scan .............................................................................................................................103
7.8 The Others Screen ..........................................................................................................................104
7.9 The Channel Status Screen ............................................................................................................105
7.10 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................106
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview .................................................................................................106
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms ...................................................................................................108
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview .................................................................................................108
7.10.4 Signal Problems .................................................................................................................. 110
7.10.5 BSS ..................................................................................................................................... 111
7.10.6 MBSSID ............................................................................................................................... 111
7.10.7 Preamble Type .................................................................................................................... 112
7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ................................................................................... 112
7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ............................................................................................... 112
Chapter 8
Home Networking .............................................................................................................................120
8.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................120

8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................120
8.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................121
8.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................122
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................122
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................................126
8.4 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................127
8.4.1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example .............................................................................128
8.5 The Additional Subnet Screen ........................................................................................................129
8.6 The STB Vendor ID Screen .............................................................................................................131
8.7 The Wake on LAN Screen ..............................................................................................................131
8.8 The TFTP Server Name Screen .....................................................................................................132
8.9 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................132
8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the VMG ....................................................................................................132
8.9.2 DHCP Setup ..........................................................................................................................133
8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses .........................................................................................................133
8.9.4 LAN TCP/IP ...........................................................................................................................134
7
Table of Contents
Chapter 9
Routing ..............................................................................................................................................136
9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................136

9.2 The Routing Screen ........................................................................................................................136
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route .............................................................................................................137
9.3 The DNS Route Screen ..................................................................................................................138
9.3.1 The DNS Route Add Screen .................................................................................................138
9.4 The Policy Route Screen ................................................................................................................139
9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route ............................................................................................................140
9.5 RIP ..............................................................................................................................................141
9.5.1 The RIP Screen .....................................................................................................................141
Chapter 10
Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................142
10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................142

10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................142
10.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................143
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ........................................................................................144
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen .............................................................................................................145
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue .........................................................................................................146
10.5 The Classification Setup Screen ...................................................................................................147
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ............................................................................................................148
10.6 The QoS Shaper Setup Screen ....................................................................................................152
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper ......................................................................................................153
10.7 The QoS Policer Setup Screen .....................................................................................................153
10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .......................................................................................................154
Chapter 11
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................160
11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................160

11.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................160
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................161
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ....................................................................................................163
11.3 The Applications Screen ...............................................................................................................164
11.3.1 Add New Application ............................................................................................................164
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen ...........................................................................................................165
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .............................................................................................167
11.5 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................168
11.6 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................................168
11.7 The Address Mapping Screen .......................................................................................................169
11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..........................................................................................170
8
Table of Contents
11.8 The Sessions Screen ....................................................................................................................171

11.9.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................172
11.9.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................172
11.9.3 How NAT Works ...................................................................................................................173
11.9.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................173
Chapter 12
Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................176
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................176

12.2 The DNS Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................177
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry .............................................................................................................177
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................178
Chapter 13
IGMP/MLD..........................................................................................................................................179
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................179

13.2 The IGMP/MLD Screen .................................................................................................................179
Chapter 14
Vlan Group ........................................................................................................................................182
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................182

14.2 The Vlan Group Screen ................................................................................................................182
14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group .......................................................................................................183
Chapter 15
Interface Grouping............................................................................................................................184
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................184

15.2 The Interface Grouping Screen .....................................................................................................184
15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration .............................................................................................185
15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria .................................................................................................187
Chapter 16
USB Service ......................................................................................................................................189
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................189

16.1.2 ().What You Need To Know ................................................................................................189
16.1.3 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................190
9
Table of Contents
16.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................190

16.2.1 The Add New User Screen ..................................................................................................191
16.3 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................192
Chapter 17
Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................194
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................194

17.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................195
17.2 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................................195
17.3 The Protocol Screen ....................................................................................................................196
17.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ..............................................................................................................197
17.4 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................198
17.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ........................................................................................................199
17.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................200
Chapter 18
MAC Filter..........................................................................................................................................202
18.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................202

18.2 The MAC Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................202
Chapter 19
Parental Control ................................................................................................................................204
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................204

19.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................204
19.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile ......................................................................................205
Chapter 20
Scheduler Rule..................................................................................................................................208
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................208

20.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen ..........................................................................................................208
20.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ............................................................................................................208
Chapter 21
Certificates ........................................................................................................................................210
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................210

21.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................210
21.3.1 Create Certificate Request ................................................................................................. 211
21.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................213
21.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................214
21.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................214
10
Table of Contents
21.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................215
Chapter 22
Voice ..................................................................................................................................................217
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................217

22.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP ...................................................................................218
22.2 Before You Begin ..........................................................................................................................218
22.3 The SIP Account Screen ..............................................................................................................218
22.3.1 The SIP Account Add/Edit Screen ......................................................................................219
22.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen ................................................................................................223
22.4.1 The SIP Service Provider Add/Edit Screen ........................................................................224
22.4.2 Dial Plan Rules ....................................................................................................................230
22.5 The Phone Device Screen ...........................................................................................................231
22.6 The Region Screen ......................................................................................................................231
22.7 The Call Rule Screen ....................................................................................................................232
22.8 The Call History Screen ................................................................................................................233
22.9 The Call Summary Screen ............................................................................................................233
22.10 Technical Reference ....................................................................................................................234
22.10.1 Quality of Service (QoS) ....................................................................................................242
22.10.2 Phone Services Overview .................................................................................................242
Chapter 23
Log ....................................................................................................................................................248
23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................248

23.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................249
23.3 The Security Log Screen ...............................................................................................................249
Chapter 24
Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................251
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................251

24.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................251
24.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................252
24.4 The NAT Status Screen .................................................................................................................253
Chapter 25
VoIP Status .......................................................................................................................................254
25.1 The VoIP Status Screen ................................................................................................................254
Chapter 26
ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................256
11
Table of Contents
26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................256

26.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................256
26.2 ARP Table Screen .........................................................................................................................256
Chapter 27
Routing Table ....................................................................................................................................258
27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................258

27.2 The Routing Table Screen .............................................................................................................258
Chapter 28
Multicast Status ...............................................................................................................................260
28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................260

28.2 The IGMP Status Screen ..............................................................................................................260
28.3 The MLD Status Screen ................................................................................................................260
Chapter 29
xDSL Statistics..................................................................................................................................262
29.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...........................................................................................................262
Chapter 30
3G Statistics .....................................................................................................................................265
30.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................265

30.2 The 3G Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................265
Chapter 31
System ...............................................................................................................................................267
31.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................267

31.2 The System Screen .......................................................................................................................267
Chapter 32
User Account ....................................................................................................................................268
32.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................268

32.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................268
32.2.1 The User Account Add/Edit Screen .....................................................................................268
Chapter 33
Remote Management........................................................................................................................270
33.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................270

33.2 The MGMT Services Screen .........................................................................................................270
33.3 The Trust Domain Screen .............................................................................................................271
33.4 The Add Trust Domain Screen ......................................................................................................271
Chapter 34
SNMP .................................................................................................................................................273
12
Table of Contents
34.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................273

34.2 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................273
Chapter 35
Time Settings ....................................................................................................................................275
35.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................275

35.2 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................275
Chapter 36
E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................................277
36.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................277

36.2 The Email Notification Screen .......................................................................................................277
36.2.1 Email Notification Edit ........................................................................................................277
Chapter 37
Log Setting .......................................................................................................................................279
37.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................279

37.2 The Log Settings Screen ...............................................................................................................279
37.2.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................................280
Chapter 38
Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................282
38.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................282

38.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................282
Chapter 39
Backup Restore ................................................................................................................................285
39.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................285

39.2 The Backup Restore Screen .........................................................................................................285
39.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................287
Chapter 40
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................288
40.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................288

40.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ...................................................................................................289
40.4 802.1ag .........................................................................................................................................289
40.5 OAM Ping ......................................................................................................................................290
Chapter 41
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................293
41.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................293
13
Table of Contents
41.2 VMG Access and Login .................................................................................................................294

41.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................296
41.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................297
41.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................298
41.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................298
Part III: Appendices ....................................................................................... 300
Appendix A Customer Support ........................................................................................................302
Appendix B Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................308
Appendix C IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................321
Appendix D Services .......................................................................................................................329
Appendix E Legal Information..........................................................................................................333
Index ..................................................................................................................................................341
14
P ART I
User’s Guide
15
16
C HAPT ER 1
Introducing the VMG
1.1 Overview
The VMG is a wireless VDSL router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway. It has a DSL port and a Gigabit
Ethernet port for super-fast Internet access. The VMG supports both Packet Transfer Mode (PTM)
and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+
in case VDSL is not available.
Only use firmware for your VMG’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your VMG.
The VMG works over the analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). The VMG
has two USB ports for sharing files via a USB storage device or connecting a 3G dongle for a WAN
backup connection.
1.2 Ways to Manage the VMG

Use any of the following methods to manage the VMG.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the VMG using a
(supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the VMG

Do the following things regularly to make the VMG more secure and to manage the VMG more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the VMG to its factory default settings. If you backed
up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the VMG. You could
simply restore your last configuration.
17
Chapter 1 Introducing the VMG
1.4 Applications for the VMG

Here are some example uses for which the VMG is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access

Your VMG provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack
on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or VDSL.
The VMG cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time.
Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you
configure in the VMG. Refer to Section 6.2 on page 66 for the Network Setting >
Broadband screen.
Computers can connect to the VMG’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 VMG’s Internet Access Application
WLAN WAN
Bridging
IPoE
PPPoE
ADSL / VDSL
LAN
A
WLAN WAN
Bridging
PPPoE
IPoE
PPPoA
IPoA
ADSL
LAN
A
You can also configure IP filtering on the VMG for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on, all
incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from
your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you
can safely browse the Internet and download files.
1.4.2 VMG’s USB Support

The USB port of the VMG is used for file-sharing and media server.
18
File Sharing
Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can
connect one USB hard drive to the VMG at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device.
Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application
Media Server
You can also use the VMG as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music,
and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the VMG’s USB port (without having to copy them
to another computer).
Figure 3 USB Media Server Application
1.5 LEDs (Lights)

The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
19
Figure 4 LEDs on the VMG
None of the LEDs are on if the VMG is not receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Green On The VMG is receiving power and ready for use.
Power Blinking The VMG is self-testing.

Red On The VMG detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device
malfunction.
Off The VMG is not receiving power.
Green On The VDSL line is up.
DSL Blinking The VMG is initializing the VDSL line.

Off The DSL line is down.
Green On The VMG has an IP connection but no traffic.
Internet Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP
server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the
DSL connection is up.
Blinking The VMG is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode.
Red On The VMG attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible
causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE
authentication failed.
Green On The VMG has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection on the WAN.
Ethernet Blinking The VMG is sending or receiving data to/from the WAN at 1000 Mbps.
WAN Orange On The VMG has a successful 10/100 Mbps Ethernet connection on the
WAN.
Blinking The VMG is sending or receiving data to/from the WAN at 10/100 Mbps.
Off There is no Ethernet connection on the WAN.
Green On The VMG has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device
on the Local Area Network (LAN).
Blinking The VMG is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 1000 Mbps.
LAN1~4
Off The VMG does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.
Green On The 2.4 GHz wireless network is activated.
WLAN/WPS Blinking The VMG is communicating with 2.4 GHz wireless clients.
Orange Blinking The VMG is setting up a WPS connection with a 2.4 GHz wireless client.
Off The 2.4 GHz wireless network is not activated.
Green On A SIP account is registered for the phone port.
Phone1, Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook
Phone2 or there is an incoming call.
Orange On A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice
message in the corresponding SIP account.
Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook
and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account.
Off The phone port does not have a SIP account registered.
20
Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued)

LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Green On The VMG recognizes a USB connection through the USB slot.
USB Blinking The VMG is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected
to it.
Off The VMG does not detect a USB connection through the USB slot.
1.6 The RESET Button

If you forget your password or cannot access the Web Configurator, you will need to use the RESET
button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you
will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
1 Make sure the PWR/SYS LED is on (not blinking).
2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or
until the PWR/SYS LED begins to blink and then release it. When the PWR/SYS LED begins to
blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
1.7 Wireless Access

The VMG is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs
and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet
cables.
You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS
button.
Figure 5 Wireless Access Example
1.7.1 Using the Wi-Fi and WPS Buttons

If the wireless network is turned off, press the Wi-Fi On/Off button for one second. Once the
WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.
You can also use the WPS On/Off button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between
the VMG and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
21
To activate WPS:
1 Make sure the PWR/SYS LED is on and not blinking.
2 Press the WPS On/Off button for two seconds and release it.
3 Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the VMG. The WLAN/WPS
LED flashes orange while the VMG sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device.
4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green.
To turn off the wireless network, press the Wi-Fi On/Off button for one to five seconds. The
WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
22
C HAPT ER 2
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy VMG setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 8.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3
and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by
768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your VMG. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
1 Make sure your VMG hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
2 Launch your web browser. If the VMG does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to
http://192.168.1.1.
3 A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the VMG,
type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If
advanced account security is enabled (see Section 32.2 on page 268) the number of dots that
appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password
field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your
password and click Login.
Figure 6 Password Screen
23
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
4 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. Enter a new password,
retype it to confirm and click Apply.
Figure 7 Change Password Screen
5 Configure basic Internet access, and wireless settings. The Network Map page appears.
Figure 8 Network Map
6 Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the VMG’s interface and system
information.
24
2.2 Web Configurator Layout

Figure 9 Screen Layout
A
B
C
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - title bar
• B - main window
• C - navigation panel
2.2.1 Title Bar

The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.
25
The icons provide the following functions.
Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar

ICON DESCRIPTION
Language: Select the language you prefer.
Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the VMG’s time zone
Internet access, and wireless settings.
Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
2.2.2 Navigation Panel

Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure VMG features. The
following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary

LINK TAB FUNCTION
Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the VMG and computers/
devices connected to it.
Network Setting
Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP
address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add
new WAN connections.
3G Backup Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection.
Advanced Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex
J, and DSL PhyR functions.
Ethernet WAN Use this screen to enable the fourth Ethernet LAN port to be an
Ethernet WAN port.
802.1x Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the
VMG.
Wireless General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN
authentication/security settings.
Guest/More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the VMG.
MAC Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices
Authentication of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the VMG.
WPS Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) settings.
WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM).
WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to
other access points.
Others Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings.
Channel Status Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the
results.
26
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)

LINK TAB FUNCTION
Home LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced
Networking properties.
Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC
addresses.
UPnP Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off.
Additional Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
Subnet
STB Vendor ID Use this screen to configure the Vendor IDs of the connected Set Top
Box (STB) devices, which have the VMG automatically create static
DHCP entries for the STB devices when they request IP addresses.
Wake on Lan Use this screen to remotely turn on a device on the local network.
TFTP Server Use DHCP option 66 to identify a TFTP server name.
Name
Routing Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the VMG.
DNS Route Use this screen to forward DNS queries for certain domain names
through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s).
Policy Route Use this screen to configure policy routing on the VMG.
RIP Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to
exchange routing information with other routers.
QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also
configure the QoS rules and actions.
Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Classification Use this screen to define a classifier.
Setup
Shaper Setup Use this screen to limit outgoing traffic rate on the selected interface.
Policer Setup Use this screen to configure QoS policers.
NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside
world.
Applications Use this screen to configure servers behind the VMG.
Port Triggering Use this screen to change your VMG’s port triggering settings.
DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets
from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen.
ALG Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.
Address Mapping Use this screen to change your VMG’s address mapping settings.
Sessions Use this screen to configure the maximum number of NAT sessions
each client host is allowed to have through the VMG.
DNS DNS Entry Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes.
Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP
address.
IGMP/MLD Use this screen to configure multicast settings (IGMP for IPv4 and
MLD for IPv6 multicast groups) on the WAN.
Vlan Group Vlan Group Use this screen to group and tag VLAN IDs to outgoing traffic from
the specified interface.
Interface Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.
Grouping
USB Service File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the VMG.
Media Server Use this screen to use the VMG as a media server.
27

LINK TAB FUNCTION
Security
Firewall General Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall.
Protocol Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules.
Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
services.
DoS Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS)
attacks.
MAC Filter Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC
addresses to the VMG.
Parental Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL.
Control
Scheduler Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured
Rules restriction (such as parental control) is enforced.
Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage
certificates and certification requests.
Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
VoIP
SIP SIP Account Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account and
configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones
connected to the VMG.
SIP Service Use this screen to configure the SIP server information, QoS for VoIP
Provider calls, the numbers for certain phone functions, and dialing plan.
Phone Phone Device Use this screen to view detailed information of the phone devices.
Region Use this screen to select your location and a call service mode.
Call Rule Speed Dial Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that
you call often.
Call History Call History Use this screen to view a call history list.
Call Summary Use this screen to view the summary of received, dialed and missed
calls.
System Monitor
28

LINK TAB FUNCTION
Log System Log Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the VMG.
You can export or e-mail the logs.
Security Log Use this screen to view all security related events. You can select
level and category of the security events in their proper drop-down
list window.
Levels include:
• Emergency
• Alert
• Critical
• Error
• Warning
• Notice
• Informational
• Debugging
Categories include:
• Account
• Attack
• Firewall
• MAC Filter
Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the WAN port of the VMG.
LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the LAN ports of the VMG.
NAT Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts.
VoIP Status Use this screen to view VoIP registration, current call statust and
phone numbers for the phone ports.
ARP table Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC
address of each DHCP connection.
Routing Table Use this screen to view the routing table on the VMG.
Multicast IGMP Status Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the VMG.
Status
MLD Status Use this screen to view the status of all MLD settings on the VMG.
xDSL Statistics Use this screen to view the VMG’s xDSL traffic statistics.
3G Statistics Use this screen to look at 3G Internet connection status.
Maintenance
System Use this screen to set Device name and Domain name.
User Account User Account Use this screen to change user password on the VMG.
Remote MGMT Services Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
Management services.
Trust Domain Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed
to access the VMG through the services configured in the
Maintenance > Remote Management screen.
SNMP Use this screen to configure SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) settings.
Time Use this screen to change your VMG’s time and date.
Email Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender
Notification addresses on the VMG.
Log Setting Use this screen to change your VMG’s log settings.
29

LINK TAB FUNCTION
Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your VMG.
Upgrade
Backup/ Backup/Restore Use this screen to backup and restore your VMG’s configuration
Restore (settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Reboot Use this screen to reboot the VMG without turning the power off.
Diagnostic Ping&Traceroute Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can
&Nslookup use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems.
802.1ag Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management)
MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association),
perform connectivity tests and view test reports.
OAM Ping Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with
the DSL connection.
30
C HAPT ER 3
Quick Start
3.1 Overview
Use the Quick Start screens to configure the VMG’s time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless
settings.
Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on Chapter 4 on page 33) for
background information on the features in this chapter.
3.2 Quick Start Setup

1 The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the QuickClick Start
icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time
zone of your location. Click Next.
Figure 10 Quick Start - Welcome
2 Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary
depending on your current connection type. Click Next.
31
Chapter 3 Quick Start
Figure 11 Quick Start - Internet Connection
3 Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure
your wireless clients to connect to the VMG. Click Save.
Figure 12 Quick Start - Wireless
4 Your VMG saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet.
32
C HAPT ER 4
Tutorials
4.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to use the VMG’s various features.
• Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection, see page 33

• Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 36
• Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 42
• Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 45
• Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 47
• Access the VMG Using DDNS, see page 51
• Configuring the MAC Address Filter, see page 52
• Access Your Shared Files From a Computer, see page 53
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection

This tutorial shows you how to set up an ADSL Internet connection using the Web Configurator.
If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet
Service Provider (ISP) to configure the VMG. Be sure to contact your service provider for any
information you need to configure the Broadband screens.
1 Click Network Setting > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add New WAN
Interface.
2 In this example, the DSL connection has the following information.
General
Name MyDSLConnection
Type ADSL
33
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Connection Mode Routing

Encapsulation PPPoE
IPv6/IPv4 Mode IPv4
ATM PVC Configuration
VPI/VCI 36/48
Encapsulation Mode LLC/SNAP-Bridging
Service Category UBR without PCR
Account Information
PPP User Name 1234@DSL-Ex.com
PPP Password ABCDEF!
PPPoE Service Name MyDSL
Static IP Address 192.168.1.32
Others Authentication Method: AUTO
PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled
NAT: Enabled
IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled
Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled
VLAN: Disabled
3 Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided
above.
Set the Type to ADSL over ATM.
Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service
provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection. Therefore, select
PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type.
Set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only.
4 Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider.
5 Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway
check box. Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as
192.168.5.2 (DNS server1)/192.168.5.1 (DNS server2).
6 Leave the rest of the fields to the default settings.
7 Click Apply to save your settings.
34
Chapter 4 Tutorials
35
Chapter 4 Tutorials
8 You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows.
Try to connect to a website to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to
contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens.
4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network

Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet.
In this wireless network, the VMG serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless
client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP.
Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the VMG. Then he can set up a wireless
network using WPS (Section 4.3.2 on page 37) or manual configuration (Section 4.3.3 on page 41).
4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings

This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network.
SSID Example
Security Mode WPA2-PSK
Pre-Shared Key DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork
802.11 Mode 802.11b/g/n Mixed
1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level and WPA2-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided
parameters (see page 36). Click Apply.
36
Chapter 4 Tutorials
2 Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field.
Click Apply.
Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and
the VMG (see Section 4.3.2 on page 37). He can also use the notebook’s wireless client to search
for the VMG (see Section 4.3.3 on page 41).
4.3.2 Using WPS

This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the VMG as the AP and
ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter
or PCMCIA card).
37
Chapter 4 Tutorials
There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two
methods.
• PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the VMG. A wireless
client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the
VMG.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
1 Make sure that your VMG is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless
signal.
2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook.
3 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button).
4 Push and hold the WPS button located on the VMG’s front panel for more than 5 seconds.
Alternatively, you may log into VMG’s web configurator and go to the Network Setting >
Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function for method 1 and click Apply. Then click the
Connect button.
2
Note: Your VMG has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS button in its
configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use one
or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button
within two minutes of pressing the first one.
38
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The VMG sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two
minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the VMG securely.
The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by
pressing a button on both VMG and wireless client.
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
Wireless Client
VMG
WLAN/
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Press and hold for

5 seconds
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the VMG’s web configurator and
the wireless client’s utility.
1 Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method
to get a PIN number.
2 Log into VMG’s web configurator and go to the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen.
Enable the WPS function and click Apply.
39
Chapter 4 Tutorials
2
3 Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on
the wireless client utility screen within two minutes.
The VMG authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the
wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate
with the VMG securely.
The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a VMG and a
wireless client by using PIN method.
40
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Wireless Client VMG
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
4.3.3 Without WPS

Use the wireless adapter’s utility installed on the notebook to search for the “Example” SSID. Then
enter the “DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork” pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet
connection.
Note: The VMG supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure that
your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these standards.
41
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups

Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown
in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode.
Company
VIP Guest
• Employees in Company A will use a general Company wireless network group.

• Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group.
• Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a different SSID and password.
Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups.
COMPANY VIP GUEST

SSID Company VIP Guest
Security Level More Secure More Secure More Secure
Security Mode WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK WPA2-PSK
Pre-Shared Key ForCompanyOnly 123456789 guest123
1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the
company’s general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters
and click Apply.
42
Chapter 4 Tutorials
2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP to open the following screen. Click the
Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group.
3 Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
43
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4 In the Guest/More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network
group.Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
44
Chapter 4 Tutorials
5 Check the status of VIP and Guest in the Guest/More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the
SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access.
4.5 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another

Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to
the VMG’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows
how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings.
45
Chapter 4 Tutorials
In the following figure, router R is connected to the VMG’s LAN. R connects to two networks, N1
(192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1
network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the VMG’s WAN default gateway by
default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
N1
A
R
N2
You need to specify a static routing rule on the VMG to specify R as the router in charge of
forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the VMG routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the
traffic to B.
N1
A
R
N2
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial

DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
The VMG’s WAN 172.16.1.1
The VMG’s LAN 192.168.1.1
IP Type IPv4
Use Interface VDSL/ppp1.1
A 192.168.1.34
46
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial

DEVICE / COMPUTER IP ADDRESS
R’s N1 192.168.1.253
R’s N2 192.168.10.2
B 192.168.10.33
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1 Log into the VMG’s Web Configurator in advanced mode.
2 Click Network Setting > Routing.
3 Click Add new Static Route in the Static Route screen.
4 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R.
4b Set IP Type to IPv4.
4c Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2.
4d Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field. Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address)
in the Gateway IP Address field.
4e Select VDSL/ppp1.1 as the Use Interface.
4a Click OK.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall
settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
4.6 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup

This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
47
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic
because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also
upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your
colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other
branch offices.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of
10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest
priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN
interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion.
• Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for
example) of your computer and map it to queue 7.
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the VMG.
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS
mapping table on the VMG.
QoS Example
DSL
10,000 kbps
Your computer
IP=192.168.1.23
and/or
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
Email traffic: Highest priority A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
1 Click Network Setting > QoS > General and select Enable. Set your WAN Managed Upstream
Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the VMG automatically determine this
figure). Click Apply.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
2 Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check
Active and enter or select the following values:
• Name: E-mail
48
Chapter 4 Tutorials
• Interface: WAN
• Priority: 1 (High)
• Weight: 8
• Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps)
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
3 Click Class Setup > Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the
settings as shown in the screen below.
49
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
Class Name Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example.
From This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1 for this
Interface example.
Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address.
IP Address Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet Mask if you
know it.
MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you
know it.
To Queue Link this to an item in the Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup screen, which is the E-
Index mail queue created in this example.
50
Chapter 4 Tutorials
This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the
previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computer’s IP address and MAC
address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields).
4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting > QoS > Monitor. This shows
the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic.
4.7 Access the VMG Using DDNS

If you connect your VMG to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient
for you to manage the device from the Internet. The VMG’s WAN IP address changes dynamically.
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the VMG using a domain name.
http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
w.x.y.z a.b.c.d
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial covers:
• Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org

• Configuring DDNS on Your VMG
• Testing the DDNS Setting
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
4.7.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
2 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and
password.
3 Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
4 Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example.
• Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
• Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your VMG is currently using. You can find the IP
address on the VMG’s Web Configurator Status page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the VMG later.
51
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.7.2 Configuring DDNS on Your VMG

Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS screen.
• Select Enable Dynamic DNS.

• Select www.DynDNS.com as the service provider.
• Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
• Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
Click Apply.
4.7.3 Testing the DDNS Setting

Now you should be able to access the VMG from the Internet. To test this:
1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the
Internet.
2 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
3 The VMG’s login page should appear. You can then log into the VMG and manage it.
4.8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter

Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and
downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she
can concentrate on preparing for her final exams.
Josephine’s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the VMG. Thomas decides to use
the Security > MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to
Josephine’s computer.
52
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Thomas
Josephine
1 Click Security > MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen. Select the Enable check box to
activate MAC filter function.
2 Select Allow. Then enter the host name and MAC address of Thomas’ computer in this screen. Click
Apply.
Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends.
However, Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet
through the VMG.
4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer

Here is how to use an FTP program to access a file storage device connected to the VMG’s USB port.
Note: This example uses the FileZilla FTP program to browse your shared files.
53
Chapter 4 Tutorials
1 In FileZilla enter the IP address of the VMG (the default is 192.168.1.1), your account’s user name
and password and port 21 and click Quickconnect. A screen asking for password authentication
appears.
File Sharing via Windows Explorer
2 Once you log in the USB device displays in the mnt folder.
54
P ART II
Technical Reference
55
56
C HAPT ER 5
Network Map and Status Screens
5.1 Overview
After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network
connection status of the VMG and clients connected to it.
You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the VMG, system resources, and
interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN).
5.2 The Network Map Screen

Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning
message appears if there is a connection problem.
Figure 13 Network Map: Icon View Mode
57
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
If you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and Info. Click the IP address
if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change name/
icon.
If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing mode selection box. You
can configure how often you want the VMG to update this screen in Refresh interval.
Figure 14 Network Map: List View Mode
5.3 The Status Screen

Use this screen to view the status of the VMG. Click Status to open this screen.
58
Figure 15 Status Screen
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 5 Status Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the VMG to update this screen.
Device Information
Host Name This field displays the VMG system name. It is used for identification.
Model Number This shows the model number of your VMG.
Serial Number This field displays the serial number of the VMG.
Firmware This is the current version of the firmware inside the VMG.
Version
WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.)
Encapsulation This field displays the current encapsulation method.
IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the VMG in the WAN.
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your VMG.
Primary DNS This field displays the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
server
59
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Secondary DNS This field displays the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
server
DHCP This field displays whether the WAN interface is using a DHCP IP address or a static IP
address. Choices are:
Client - The WAN interface can obtain an IP address from a DHCP server.
None - The WAN interface is using a static IP address.

LAN Information
IP Address This is the current IP address of the VMG in the LAN.
IP Subnet Mask This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.
IPv6 Link Local This field displays the current link-local address of the VMG for the LAN interface.
Address
DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the VMG is providing to the LAN. The possible
values are:
Server - The VMG is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other
computers in the LAN.
Relay - The VMG acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and
responses between the remote server and the clients.
None - The VMG is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.
MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your VMG.
WLAN 2.4G Information
MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of the wireless
interface.
Status This displays whether the WLAN is activated.
SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the VMG in a wireless LAN.
Channel This is the channel number used by the wireless interface now.
Security This displays the type of security mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless
LAN.
802.11 Mode This displays the type of 802.11 mode the wireless interface is using in the wireless LAN.
WPS This displays whether WPS is activated on the wireless interface.
Security
Firewall This displays the firewall’s current security level.
System Status
System Up This field displays how long the VMG has been running since it last started up. The VMG
Time starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when
you reset it.
Current Date/ This field displays the current date and time in the VMG. You can change this in
Time Maintenance> Time Setting.
System Resource
CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the VMG’s processing ability is currently used.
When this percentage is close to 100%, the VMG is running at full load, and the
throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have
more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see
Chapter 10 on page 142).
Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the VMG’s memory is currently used. Usually, this
percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the
VMG is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 39.2
on page 285, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds.
60
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
NAT Session This field displays what percentage of the VMG supported NAT sessions are currently
Usage being used. This field also displays the number of active NAT sessions and the maximum
number of NAT sessions the VMG can support.
Interface Status
Interface This column displays each interface the VMG has.
Status This field indicates the interface’s use status.
For the LAN and Ethernet WAN interfaces, this field displays Up when using the interface
and NoLink when not using the interface.
For a WLAN interface, this field displays the enabled (Up) or disabled (Disable) state of
the interface.
For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line down), Up (line up or connected)
,Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation, and NoLink when not using
the interface.
For the 3G interface, this field displays Up when using the interface and NoDevice when
no device is detected in any USB slot.
Rate For the Ethernet WAN and LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting.
For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate or N/A with WLAN
disabled.
For the 3G interface, this field displays Up when a 3G device is installed in a USB slot
and N/A when no device is detected in any USB slot.
Registration Status
Account This column displays each SIP account in the VMG.
Action If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server, the Account Status field
displays Registered.
Click Unregister to delete the SIP account’s registration in the SIP server. This does not
cancel your SIP account, but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your
IP address or domain name.
If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server, the Account Status field
displays Not Registered.
Click Register to have the VMG attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server.
The button is grayed out if the SIP account is disabled.

Account Status This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You have to register
SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP.
Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP > SIP > SIP
Account.
Not Registered - The last time the VMG tried to register the SIP account with the SIP
server, the attempt failed. Use the Register button to register the account again. The
VMG automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the VMG or when
you activate it.
Registered - The SIP account is already registered with the SIP server. You can use it
to make a VoIP call.
Service This column displays the service provider name and SIP number for each SIP account.
Provider
URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can
change these in the VoIP > SIP screens.
61
C HAPT ER 6
Broadband
6.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the VMG’s Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your VMG for
Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 16 LAN and WAN
WAN
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter

• Use the Broadband screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the
WAN settings on the VMG for Internet access (Section 6.2 on page 66).
• Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 6.3 on page 76).
• Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR
functions (Section 6.4 on page 80).
• Use the Ethernet WAN screen to enable the fourth Ethernet LAN port to be an Ethernet WAN
port (Section 6.5 on page 82).
• Use the 802.1x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1X settings on the VMG (Section 6.6
on page 83).
62
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 6 WAN Setup Overview

LAYER-2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION
DSL LINK
CONNECTION MODE ENCAPSULATION CONNECTION SETTINGS
TYPE
ADSL/VDSL N/A Routing PPPoE PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP
over PTM address, routing feature, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
IPoE IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing
feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS,
and MTU
Bridge N/A VLAN and QoS
ADSL over ATM EoA Routing PPPoE/PPPoA ATM PVC configuration, PPP
information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address,
routing feature, DNS server, VLAN,
QoS, and MTU
IPoE/IPoA ATM PVC configuration, IPv4/IPv6
IP address, routing feature, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
Bridge N/A ATM PVC configuration, and QoS
Ethernet N/A Routing PPPoE PPP user name and password, WAN
IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing
feature, DNS server, VLAN, QoS,
and MTU
IPoE WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, NAT,
DNS server and routing feature
Bridge N/A VLAN and QoS
6.1.2 What You Need to Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the VMG, which makes it accessible from an outside
network. It is used by the VMG to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be
static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the VMG tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es).
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data
transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of
Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit
(VC) between Finding Out More
63
Chapter 6 Broadband
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM,
packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed
to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an
alternative to ATM.
IPv6 Introduction
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses. The VMG can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and
supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD).
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So

2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as
2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double
colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So
2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as
2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length

Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
IPv6 Subnet Masking

Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
64
Chapter 6 Broadband
IPv6 Rapid Deployment

Use IPv6 Rapid Deployment (6rd) when the local network uses IPv6 and the ISP has an IPv4
network. When the VMG has an IPv4 WAN address and you set IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv4 Only,
you can enable 6rd to encapsulate IPv6 packets in IPv4 packets to cross the ISP’s IPv4 network.
The VMG generates a global IPv6 prefix from its IPv4 WAN address and tunnels IPv6 traffic to the
ISP’s Border Relay router (BR in the figure) to connect to the native IPv6 Internet. The local
network can also use IPv4 services. The VMG uses it’s configured IPv4 WAN IP to route IPv4 traffic
to the IPv4 Internet.
Figure 17 IPv6 Rapid Deployment
LAN WAN
- IPv6 - IPv4
- IPv4 - IPv6 in IPv4
ISP (IPv4) BR
IPv6 in IPv4 IPv6 Internet
IPv6 + IPv4
IPv4
IPv4 Internet
Dual Stack Lite

Use Dual Stack Lite when local network computers use IPv4 and the ISP has an IPv6 network.
When the VMG has an IPv6 WAN address and you set IPv6/IPv4 Mode to IPv6 Only, you can
enable Dual Stack Lite to use IPv4 computers and services.
The VMG tunnels IPv4 packets inside IPv6 encapsulation packets to the ISP’s Address Family
Transition Router (AFTR in the graphic) to connect to the IPv4 Internet. The local network can also
use IPv6 services. The VMG uses it’s configured IPv6 WAN IP to route IPv6 traffic to the IPv6
Internet.
65
Chapter 6 Broadband
Figure 18 Dual Stack Lite
LAN WAN
- IPv6 - IPv6
- IPv4 - IPv4 in IPv6
ISP (IPv6) IPv6 Internet

IPv6
IPv6 + IPv4
IPv4 in IPv6
AFTR
IPv4 Internet
6.1.3 Before You Begin

You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this
information from your ISP.
6.2 The Broadband Screen

Use this screen to change your VMG’s Internet access settings. Click Network Setting >
Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services
(connections) on the VMG.
Figure 19 Network Setting > Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New WAN Click this button to create a new connection.
Interface
# This is the index number of the entry.
Name This is the service name of the connection.
Type This shows whether it is an ATM, Ethernet or a PTM connection.
Mode This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode.
Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection.
802.1p This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N/A when there is no priority level assigned.
66
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.1q This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N/A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned.
IGMP Proxy This shows whether the VMG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection.
NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection.
Default This shows whether the VMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default
Gateway gateway.
IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when
the connection uses the bridging service.
MLD Proxy This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this
connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection.
67
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection

Click Add New WAN Interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN
interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode,
encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select.
6.2.1.1 Routing Mode

Use Routing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
The following example screen displays when you select the ADSL/VDSL over ATM connection
type, Routing mode, and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface
type, encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode.
Figure 20 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode)
68
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select this to enable the interface.
Name Specify a descriptive name for this connection.
Type Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet.
Mode Select Routing if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This
option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.
The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is ADSL/
VDSL over PTM, the choices are PPPoE and IPoE. If your connection type is ADSL over
ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA.
IPv6/IPv4 Mode Select IPv4 Only if you want the VMG to run IPv4 only.
Select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack to allow the VMG to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time.
Select IPv6 Only if you want the VMG to run IPv6 only.
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.)
VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM
traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type The choices in this field change according to the Encapsulation method chosen above. This
field is not editable. PPPoA and IPoA encapsulation use the same named DSL Link Type.
Ethernet-over-ATM (EoA) is used for PPPoE, and IPoE encapsulation.
EoA a protocol for data transfer between Ethernet LAN and WAN over the ATM protocol. It
creates a bridged connection between the VMG and the ISP. It uses an Ethernet header in
the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set
each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but
use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and
RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.
Encapsulation Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices
Mode are:
• LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by

identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when
you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field.
• VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit
(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the VMG needs separate VCs. There is a binding
between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces
payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol
Data Unit (PDU) payload.
• LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This
is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field.
• LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be
followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is
available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field.
69
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (Routing Mode) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive,
Category such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections
that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
PPP Information (This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field.)
PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form
user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly
as given.
PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above. Select password unmask to
show your entered password in plain text.
PPP Trigger Select when to have the VMG establish the PPP connection.
Type
Auto Connect - select this to not let the connection time out.
Connect on Demand - select this to automatically bring up the connection when the VMG
receives packets destined for the Internet.
Manual - select this if you want to manually trigger the connection up.
Authentication Select an authentication protocol for outgoing connection requests through this WAN
Method interface.
PAP - Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) authentication sends user name and
password in clear text without using encryption. Select this if your VMG accepts PAP only.
CHAP - Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) provides authentication

through a shared secret key and uses a three way handshake. Select this if your VMG
accepts CHAP only.
MSCHAP - Microsoft CHAP provides authentication through a shared secret key and uses a
three way handshake. It provides improved usability with Microsoft products. Select this if
your VMG accepts MSCHAP only.
AUTO - Select this if your VMG accepts either PAP, CHAP, or MSCHAP authentication
method.
Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically
disconnects from the PPPoE server.
This field is not configurable if you select Auto Connect in the PPP Trigger Type field.
PPPoE Service Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.
Name
PPPoE This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
Passthrough
In addition to the VMG’s built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up
to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the
ISP via the VMG. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate.
Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client
software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
IP Address (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/IPv4
Mode field.)
70
Chapter 6 Broadband
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;
Address the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you
Automatically have a dynamic IP address.
DHCP This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the class vender ID you
option 60/ want the VMG to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server.
Vendor ID
DHCP This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the Identity Association
option 61 Identifier (IAD) you want the VMG to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the
IAD
DHCP server.
DHCP This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the DHCP Unique Identifier
option 61 (DUID) you want the VMG to add in the DHCP Discovery packets that go to the DHCP server.
DUID
DHCP This field displays when editing an existing WAN interface. Type the vender specific
option 43 information you want the VMG to add in the DHCP Offer packets. The information is used,
Enable
for example, for configuring an ACS’s (Auto Configuration Server) URL.
Static IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
Address
IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Mask
Gateway IP Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Address
Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/
IPv4 Mode field.)
NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection.
Fullcone NAT Select this option to enable full cone NAT on this connection. This field is available only when
Enable you activate NAT. In full cone NAT, the VMG maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP
address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network. The VMG also
maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and
port.
IGMP Proxy Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
Enable membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
Select this option to have the VMG act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the
VMG to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast
group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Apply as Select this option to have the VMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
Default default gateway.
Gateway
DNS Server (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6/IPv4 DualStack in the IPv6/IPv4
Mode field.)
DNS Select Obtain DNS Info Automically if you want the VMG to use the DNS server
addresses assigned by your ISP.
Select Use Following Static DNS Address if you want the VMG to use the DNS server
addresses you configure manually.
DNS Server1 Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
DNS Server 2 Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
71
Chapter 6 Broadband
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Tunnel (This is available only when you select IPv4 Only or IPv6 Only in the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field.)
The DS-Lite (Dual Stack Lite) fields display when you set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field to IPv6 Only.
Enable Dual Stack Lite to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP’s IPv6 network. See Dual Stack Lite on
page 65 for more information.
The 6RD (IPv6 rapid deployment) fields display when you set the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field to IPv4 Only. See
IPv6 Rapid Deployment on page 65 for more information.
Enable DS-Lite This is available only when you select IPv6 Only in the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field. Select
Enable to let local computers use IPv4 through an ISP’s IPv6 network.
DS-Lite Relay Specify the transition router’s IPv6 address.
Server IP
Enable 6RD This is available only when you select IPv4 Only in the IPv6/IPv4 Mode field. Select
Enable to tunnel IPv6 traffic from the local network through the ISP’s IPv4 network.
6RD Type Select Static if you have the IPv4 address of the relay server, otherwise select DHCP to
have the VMG detect it automatically through DHCP.
IPv4 Mask Enter the subnet mask number (1~32) for the IPv4 network.
Length
6RD Border When you set the 6RD Type to Static, specify the relay server’s IPv4 address in this field.
Relay Server IP
6RD IPv6 Prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix for tunneling IPv6 traffic to the ISP’s border relay router and connecting
to the native IPv6 Internet.
IPv6 Address (This is available only when you select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the IPv6/IPv4
Mode field.)
IPv6 Address Select Automatic if you want to have the VMG use the IPv6 prefix from the connected
router’s Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address.
• Select Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server(IA_NA) if you want to obtain an IPv6
address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority
over the IP address automatically generated by the VMG using the IPv6 prefix from an
RA. This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address
automatically.
• Select Prefix Delegation(IA_PD) to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) which enables
the VMG to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use the
prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
Select Static if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.
Select None to not assign any IPv6 address to this WAN connection.
Prefix Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address
Length compose the network address.
Next Hop Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the
same segment as your VMG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their
destinations.
IPv6 Routing Feature (This is available only when you select IPv6/IPv4 DualStack or IPv6 Only in the
IPv6/IPv4 Mode field. You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section.)
MLD Proxy Select this checkbox to have the VMG act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows
Enable the VMG to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Apply as Select this option to have the VMG use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
Default default gateway.
Gateway
IPv6 DNS Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section.
Server
72
Chapter 6 Broadband
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv6 DNS Select Dynamic to have the VMG get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP
automatically.
Select Static to have the VMG use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually.
IPv6 DNS Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Server 1
IPv6 DNS Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Server 2
VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM.)
Active Select this to enable VLAN on this WAN interface.
802.1p IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame
that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
Rate Limit Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
WAN Outgoing Select Enable and enter a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value to have the VMG add it in the
Default Tag packets sent by this WAN interface.
802.1p This field displays if you activate VLAN for this WAN interface. Enter a priority level (from 0
to 7) to have the VMG add it to traffic through this connection.
DSCP If you enable Select WAN Outgoing Default Tag, enter a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point)
value to have the VMG add it in the packets sent by this WAN interface.
MTU
MTU Size Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic.
Bridging and Use this feature to bridge a LAN port(s) with the WAN interface. Traffic to/from LAN ports
Routing in the not in the bridge is routed from the WAN interface.
same WAN
ADSL use same VPI/VCI in Bridge and Route modes.
VDSL use same VLAN in Bridge and Route modes.

Enable Con- Enable this if you want to use the same VPI/VCI settings in different WAN interfaces. Select
current WAN this and then choose the ports to bridge with the WAN interface. \
• ADSL concurrent WAN uses the same VCI/PVI in both routing and bridge modes.
• VDSL concurrent WAN uses same VLAN in both routing and bridge mode.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the VMG.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
6.2.1.2 Bridge Mode

Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting > Broadband screen or the Edit icon
next to the connection you want to configure. Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode. The screen
varies depending on the interface type you select.
If you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface type, the following screen appears.
73
Chapter 6 Broadband
Figure 21 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL/VDSL over PTM -
Bridge Mode)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL/VDSL over PTM -
Bridge Mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select this to enable the interface.
Name Enter a service name of the connection.
Type Select ADSL/VDSL over PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The VMG uses the
VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.
Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you select
Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on
traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
VLAN This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field.
Active Select Enable to enable VLAN on this WAN interface.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The
greater the number, the higher the priority level.
OK Click OK to save your changes.
If you select ADSL over ATM as the interface type, the following screen appears.
74
Chapter 6 Broadband
Figure 22 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL over ATM-Bridge
Mode)
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL over ATM-Bridge
Mode)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Name Enter a service name of the connection.
Type Select ADSL over ATM as the interface that you want to configure. The VMG uses the ADSL
technology for data transmission over the DSL port.
Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you
select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and
NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.)
VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM
traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
Encapsulation Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices
are:
• LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by
identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when
you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Encapsulation field.
• VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit (VC).
To transport multiple protocols, the VMG needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a
VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead
since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU)
payload.
75
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > Add New WAN Interface/Edit (ADSL over ATM-Bridge
Mode) (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Service Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail.
Category Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections
that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
VLAN This section is available only when you select ADSL/VDSL over PTM in the Type field.
Active Select Enable to enable VLAN on this WAN interface.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
6.3 The 3G Backup Screen

The USB ports (at the left side panel of the VMG) allow you to attach a 3G dongle to wirelessly
connect to a 3G network for Internet access. You can have the VMG use the 3G WAN connection as
a backup. Disconnect the DSL and Ethernet WAN ports to use the 3G dongle as your primary WAN
connection. The VMG automatically uses a wired WAN connection when available.
Note: This VMG supports connecting one 3G dongle at a time.
Figure 23 Internet Access Application: 3G WAN
Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 3G
Backup.
76
Chapter 6 Broadband
Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal
strength to the service provider’s base station, and so on.
Figure 24 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup
Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup

LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
3G Backup Select Enable to have the VMG use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the
wired WAN connection fails.
Ping Check Select Enable if you want the VMG to ping check the connection status of your WAN. You
can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before
triggering 3G backup.
Check Cycle Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field.
Consecutive Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered.
PING Fail
Ping Default Select this to have the VMG ping the WAN interface’s default gateway IP address.
Gateway
Ping the Host Select this to have the VMG ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this
field.
3G Connection Settings
Card This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in
description the VMG. Otherwise, it displays N/A.
77
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Username Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service
provider.
Password Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name
above.
PIN A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code,
you cannot use the 3G card.
If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example)
provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by
your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet.
If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank.
Dial string Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service provider’s
base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number.
For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan.
APN Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with
different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media
Messaging Service)) and charge method.
You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed.

Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out.
Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle
time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field.
Max Idle This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the VMG automatically
Timeout disconnects from the ISP.
Obtain an IP Select this option if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
Address
Automatically
Use the Select this option if the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
following static
IP address
IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP
address.
Obtain DNS Select this to have the VMG get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically.
info
dynamically
Use the Select this to have the VMG use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.
following static
DNS IP address
Primary Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
DNS server
Secondary Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
DNS server
Enable Email Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The VMG will e-mail you a notification
Notification when the 3G connection is up.
Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below.
If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must
have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen.
3G backup Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the VMG
Send Email sends.
Title
78
Chapter 6 Broadband

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Send Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
Notification to notifications cannot be sent via e-mail.
Email
Advanced Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings.
Budget Setup
Enable Budget Select Enable to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card. You can
Control set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The VMG takes the actions you specified when
a limit is exceeded during the month.
Time Budget Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the 3G connection can be used
within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control,
the VMG resets the statistics.
Data Budget Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be
(Mbytes) transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the VMG).
Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the VMG to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the VMG resets the
statistics.
Data Budget Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in k Packets) can be
(kPackets) transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the VMG).
Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the VMG to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the VMG resets the
statistics.
Reset all Select the date on which the VMG resets the budget every month. Select last if you want
budget the VMG to reset the budget on the last day of the month. Select specific and enter the
counters on number of the date you want the VMG to reset the budget
Reset time and Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with
data budget the 3G connection’s full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the
counters normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to
reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data
budget counters will still reset on the second.
Actions before Specify the actions the VMG takes before the time or data limit exceeds.
over budget
Enable % of Select Enable and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the
time budget/ value after you configure and enable budget control, the VMG resets the statistics.
data budget
(Mbytes)/data
budget
(kPackets)
Actions when Specify the actions the VMG takes when the time or data limit is exceeded.
over budget
Current 3G Select Keep to maintain an existing 3G connection or Drop to disconnect it.
connection
Actions
Enable Email Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The VMG will e-mail you a notification
Notification when there over budget occurs.
79
Chapter 6 Broadband

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mail Server Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below.
If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must
have configured a mail server already in the Maintenance > Email Notification screen.
Over Budget Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the VMG
Email Title sends.
Send Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
Notification to notifications cannot be sent via e-mail.
Email
Interval Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the VMG to e-mail you.
Enable Log Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field.
Basic Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.
6.4 The Advanced Screen

Use the Advanced screen to enable or disable ADSL over PTM, Annex M, DSL PhyR, and SRA
(Seamless Rate Adaptation) functions. The VMG supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR is
a retransmission scheme designed to provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It improves
voice, video and data transmission resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer.
ITU-T G.993.2 standard defines a wide range of settings for various parameters, some of which are
encompassed in profiles as shown in the next table.
Table 12 VDSL Profiles

MAX.
NUMBER OF CARRIER
BANDWIDTH DOWNSTREAM
PROFILE DOWNSTREAM BANDWIDTH POWER (DBM)
(MHZ) THROUGHPUT
CARRIERS (KHZ) (MBIT/S)
8a 8.832 2048 4.3125 17.5 50
8b 8.832 2048 4.3125 20.5 50
8c 8.5 1972 4.3125 11.5 50
8d 8.832 2048 4.3125 14.5 50
12a 12 2783 4.3125 14.5 68
12b 12 2783 4.3125 14.5 68
17a 17.664 4096 4.3125 14.5 100
30a 30 3479 8.625 14.5 200
Click Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced to display the following screen.
80
Chapter 6 Broadband
Figure 25 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced
Table 13 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced

LABEL DESCRIPTION
PhyR US Enable or disable PhyR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US
should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However,
enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the
CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it
enabled.
PhyR DS Enable or disable PhyR DS (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN.
PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise.
However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will
require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and
have it enabled.
Bitswap Select Enable to allow the VMG to adapt to line changes when you are using G.dmt.
Bit-swapping is a way of keeping the line more stable by constantly monitoring and
redistributing bits between channels.
SRA Enable or disable Seamless Rate Adaption (SRA). Select Enable to have the VMG
automatically adjust the connection’s data rate according to line conditions without
interrupting service.
ADSL
Modulation
PTM over Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs
ADSL: use this for better performance.
G.Dmt: ITU G.992.1 (better known as G.dmt) is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone
modulation. G.dmt full-rate ADSL expands the usable bandwidth of existing copper
telephone lines, delivering high-speed data communications at rates up to 8 Mbit/s
downstream and 1.3 Mbit/s upstream.
81
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 13 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
G.lite : ITU G.992.2 (better known as G.lite) is an ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone
modulation. G.lite does not strictly require the use of DSL filters, but like all variants of
ADSL generally functions better with splitters.
T1.413 : ANSI T1.413 is a technical standard that defines the requirements for the single asymmetric
digital subscriber line (ADSL) for the interface between the telecommunications network and
the customer installation in terms of their interaction and electrical characteristics.
ADSL2 : It optionally extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates to 12 Mbit/s downstream
and, depending on Annex version, up to 3.5 Mbit/s upstream (with a mandatory capability
of ADSL2 transceivers of 8 Mbit/s downstream and 800 kbit/s upstream).
AnnexL : Annex L is an optional specification in the ITU-T ADSL2 recommendation G.992.3 titled
Specific requirements for a Reach Extended ADSL2 (READSL2) system operating in the
frequency band above POTS, therefore it is often referred to as Reach Extended ADSL2 or
READSL2.The main difference between this specification and commonly deployed Annex A is
the maximum distance that can be used. The power of the lower frequencies used for
transmitting data is boosted up to increase the reach of this signal up to 7 kilometers
(23,000 ft).
ADSL2+ : ADSL2+ extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream
channels. The data rates can be as high as 24 Mbit/s downstream and up to 1.4 Mbit/s
upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer's premises.
AnnexM : Annex M is an optional specification in ITU-T recommendations G.992.3 (ADSL2) and
G.992.5 (ADSL2+), also referred to as ADSL2 M and ADSL2+ M. This specification extends
the capability of commonly deployed Annex A by more than doubling the number of
upstream bits. The data rates can be as high as 12 or 24 Mbit/s downstream and 3 Mbit/s
upstream depending on the distance from the DSLAM to the customer's premises.
VDSL Profile VDSL2 profiles differ in the width of the frequency band used to transmit the broadband
signal. Profiles that use a wider frequency band can deliver higher maximum speeds.
8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, The G.993.2 VDSL standard defines a wide range of profiles that can be used in different
12a, 12b, 17a, VDSL deployment settings, such as in a central office, a street cabinet or a building.
US0
The VMG must comply with at least one profile specified in G.993.2. but compliance with
more than one profile is allowed.
6.5 The Ethernet WAN Screen

You can enable the fourth Ethernet LAN port to be an Ethernet WAN port in the Ethernet WAN
screen. Click Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN to display the following screen.
Figure 26 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN
82
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select Enable to convert the fourth Ethernet LAN port to the Ethernet WAN port. Otherwise,
select Disable.
6.6 The 802.1x Screen

You can view and configure the 802.1X authentication settings in the 802.1x screen. Click
Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x to display the following screen.
Figure 27 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x
Table 15 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that
this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active.
Interface This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
interface assigned.
EAP Identity This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no EAP
identity assigned.
EAP method This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
EAP method assigned.
Bidirectional This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed.
Authentication
Certificate This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
certificate assigned.
Trusted CA This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N/A when there is no
Trusted CA assigned.
Modify Click this icon to edit an item.
83
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.6.1 Modify 802.1X Settings

Use this screen to edit 802.1X authentication settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want
to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 28 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x > Modify
Table 16 Network Setting > Broadband > 802.1x: Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication.
Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without
having to delete the entry.
Interface Select an interface to which the authentication applies.
EAP Identity Enter the EAP identity of the authentication.
EAP method This is the EAP method used for this authentication.
Bidirectional Select Enable to allow bidirectional authentication.
Authentication
Certificate Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Security > Certificates > Local Certificates screen.
Trusted CA Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Security > Certificates > Trusted CA screen.
6.7 Technical Reference

The following section contains additional technical information about the VMG features described in
this chapter.
Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The VMG can work in bridge mode
or routing mode. When the VMG is in routing mode, it supports the following methods.
84
Chapter 6 Broadband
IP over Ethernet
IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an
Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface
and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged
environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells.
PPP over ATM (PPPoA)

PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection
functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The VMG encapsulates the PPP session based on
RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service
Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information
on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a
manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how
a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.)
connection.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the VMG (rather than individual computers), the computers on
the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the VMG does that part of the task.
Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit
(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a
separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed
information.
Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to
use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
85
Chapter 6 Broadband
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for
example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where
dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained
in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be
advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if
charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate
and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate
congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video
connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may
be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a
maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed
because it is dependent on the line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the
maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be
greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS
is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more
cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that
correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 29 Example of Traffic Shaping
86
Chapter 6 Broadband
ATM Traffic Classes

These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being
sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections
that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds
this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use
the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely
controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth
requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an
VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An
example application is background file transfer.
IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a
different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have
either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices
for IP address and default gateway.
Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of
another user in the same building.
87
Chapter 6 Broadband
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN

A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership
of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The
VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a
frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame
across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two
bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame)
and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet
frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If
a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as
it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority
level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the
4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved,
so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID
2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits
Multicast
IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast
(1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the
network - not everybody and not just 1.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an
improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to
read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please
see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be
in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group
and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is
assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the
224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast
routers group.
At start up, the VMG queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After
that, the VMG periodically updates this information.
DNS Server Address Assignment

Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely
88
Chapter 6 Broadband
important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access
it.
The VMG can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you
sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields.
2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the VMG’s WAN IP
address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP.
IPv6 Addressing
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can

be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length

example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
89
C HAPT ER 7
Wireless
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the VMG’s Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set
up your VMG’s wireless connection.

This section describes the VMG’s Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your VMG’s
wireless connection.
• Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless
security mode (Section 7.2 on page 91).
• Use the Guest/More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your VMG (Section 7.3
on page 95).
• Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC
addresses from connecting to the VMG (Section 7.4 on page 98).
• Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal
Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 99).
• Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless
networks for multimedia applications (Section 7.6 on page 101).
• Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the VMG acts as a bridge
with other ZyXEL access points (Section 7.7 on page 102).
• Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold
(Section 7.8 on page 104).
• Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and
receive information over the airwowaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with
one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange
information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to
use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in
that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data
encryption.
90
Chapter 7 Wireless
Finding Out More

See Section 7.10 on page 106 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.
7.2 The General Screen

Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the VMG from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and
you change the VMG’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your
wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the
wireless settings of your computer to match the VMG’s new settings.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen.
Figure 30 Network Setting > Wireless > General
91
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > General

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Band This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2.4GHz is the frequency used
by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients while 5GHz is used by IEEE 802.11a/ac wireless
clients.
Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Channel Use Auto to have the VMG automatically determine a channel to use.
Bandwidth Select whether the VMG uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz, 40MHz or 80MHz.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz

channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase
throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20
MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal.
An 80MHz channel groups adjacent 40MHz channels into pairs to increase bandwidth even
higher.
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your
neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
Control This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth
Sideband field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the
Lower or Upper range of channel bands.
Passphrase If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the VMG generate a password, the setting
Type in this field determines how the VMG generates the password.
Select None to set the VMG’s password generation to not be based on a passphrase.
Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password.
Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password.

Passphrase Key For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It
must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no
spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
Network Name associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
(SSID)
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Max Clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.
Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Multicast Select this check box to allow the VMG to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
Forwarding unicast traffic.
Max. Upstream Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in
Bandwidth kilobits per second (Kbps).
Max. Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in
Downstream kilobits per second (Kbps).
Bandwidth
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the VMG when wireless LAN is
enabled.
Security Level
92
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Mode Select Basic (WEP, 802.1X) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have
same wireless security settings as the VMG. When you select to use a security, additional
options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See the following sections for more details about this field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.2.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any
data encryption or authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your VMG, your network is accessible
to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 31 Wireless > General: No Security
Table 18 Wireless > General: No Security

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Choose No Security to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or
authentication.
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)

WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points
must use the same WEP key.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using
widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more
effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the
wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices
support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing
stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Your VMG allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be
enabled at any one time.
93
Chapter 7 Wireless
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the
General screen, then select Basic as the security level.
Figure 32 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
Table 19 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption.
Generate Select this option to have the VMG automatically generate a password. The password field
password will not be configurable when you select this option.
automatically
Password 1~4 The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the VMG and the wireless stations
must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one
time.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WEP Encryption Select 64-bits or 128-bits.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)

The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over
WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the VMG and the connecting client share a common
password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong
as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of
the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it
less robust than it could be.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
94
Chapter 7 Wireless
Figure 33 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
Table 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Generate Select this option to have the VMG automatically generate a password. The password field
password will not be configurable when you select this option.
automatically
Password The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only
difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of
user-specific credentials.
If you did not select Generate password automatically, you can manually type a pre-
shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WPA-PSK This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode.
Compatible
Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your
VMG. The VMG supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
Encryption Select the encryption type (TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group
Update Timer key out to all clients.
7.3 The Guest/More AP Screen

This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the VMG.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP. The following screen displays.
95
Chapter 7 Wireless
Figure 34 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP
Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active.
A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.
SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the VMG’s BSSs. The SSID (Service
Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client
scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless
client utility.
Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Guest WLAN This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN.
If Home Guest displays, clients can connect to each other directly.
If External Guest displays, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.
N/A displays if guest WLAN is disabled.

Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
7.3.1 Edit Guest/More AP

Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the Guest/More AP
screen. The following screen displays.
96
Chapter 7 Wireless
Figure 35 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit
Table 22 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Passphrase Passphrase type cannot be changed. The default is None.
Type
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
Network Name associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
(SSID)
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Max clients Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.
Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Enhanced Select this check box to allow the VMG to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
Multicast unicast traffic.
Forwarding
Guest WLAN Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients. Select the WLAN type in
the Access Scenario field.
97
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 22 Network Setting > Wireless > Guest/More AP > Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Access If you select Home Guest, clients can connect to each other directly.
Scenario
If you select External Guest, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.
Max. Upstream Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in
Bandwidth kilobits per second (Kbps).
Max. Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in
Downstream kilobits per second (Kbps).
Bandwidth
Security Level
Security Mode Select Basic (WEP, 802.1X) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have
same wireless security settings as the VMG. After you select to use a security, additional
options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See Section 7.2.1 on page 93 for more details about this field.
7.4 MAC Authentication

This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices
(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device (Deny). Every Ethernet
device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the
factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You
need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
Use this screen to view your VMG’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Network
Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 36 Wireless > MAC Authentication
98
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 23 Wireless > MAC Authentication

LABEL DESCRIPTION
SSID Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.
MAC Restrict Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Mode
Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering.
Select Deny to block access to the VMG. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access
the VMG.
Select Allow to permit access to the VMG. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to
the VMG.
Add new MAC Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.
address
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
VMG in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that
is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
MAC Address This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
VMG.
Modify Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address
format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.

7.5 The WPS Screen

Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your VMG.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS. See Section 7.10.9.3 on page 115 for more information about WPS.
Note: The VMG applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section 7.2 on
page 91). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security
mode of SSID1 to WPA2-PSK or No Security.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click
Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen.
99
Chapter 7 Wireless
Figure 37 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS

LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
WPS Select Enable to activate WPS on this VMG.
Add a new device with WPS Method
Method 1 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC).
Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 1 on the VMG.
WPS Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the
VMG) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside
of device, or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing
this button.
Method 2 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the
VMG. Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 2 on the VMG.
Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click
Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s
settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its
PIN to the VMG.
Method 3 Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the VMG into the
client. Select Enable and click Apply to activate WPS method 3 on the VMG.
Release The default WPS status is configured.
Configuration
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS
connections on the VMG.
100
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Generate If this method has been enabled, the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the VMG is
New PIN shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to
Number
using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Click the Generate New PIN button to have the VMG create a new PIN.
7.6 The WMM Screen

Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for
multimedia applications.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays.
Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM

LABEL DESCRIPTION
2.4GHz WMM Setup / 5GHz WMM Setup
WMM of Select On to have the VMG automatically give the wireless network (SSIDx) a priority level
SSID1~4 according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia
Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more
smoothly.
WMM Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for
Automatic small devices that are running multimedia applications). The VMG goes to sleep mode to
Power Save save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the VMG
Delivery(APSD) until the VMG "wakes up". The VMG wakes up periodically to check for incoming data.
Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the VMG is connected also supports this
feature.
101
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.7 The WDS Screen

An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge
allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to
configure the VMG to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled.
Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the VMG and
other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security
settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the VMG and any
wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models
support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays.
Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS

LABEL DESCRIPTION
2.4GHz Wireless Bridge Setup
AP Mode Select the operating mode for your VMG.
• Access Point - The VMG functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously.
• Wireless Bridge - The VMG acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless
links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the VMG wirelessly.
Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point.
Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC address manually in the
table below. Select Disable to turn off WDS.
Remote Bridge You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify.
MAC Address
102
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the peer device.
You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.

Modify Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address
format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.

Scan Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range.
7.7.1 WDS Scan

You can click the Scan icon in Wireless > WDS to have the VMG automatically search and display
the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the VMG establish a wireless
link with the selected wireless device.
Figure 40 WDS: Scan
Table 27 WDS: Scan

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Scan Setup
Refresh Click Refresh to update the table.
SSID This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range.
BSSID This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range.
103
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.8 The Others Screen

Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >
Others. The screen appears as shown.
See Section 7.10.2 on page 108 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.
Figure 41 Network Setting > Wireless > Others
Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others

LABEL DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS
Threshold (Clear To Send) handshake.
Enter a value between 0 and 2347.

Fragmentation This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and
Threshold 2346.
Auto Channel If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen,
Timer specify the interval in minutes for how often the VMG scans for the best channel. Enter 0 to
disable the periodical scan.
Output Power Set the output power of the VMG. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the
output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%,
40%, 60%, 80% or 100%.
Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval.
This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again.
The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power
mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms.
A high value helps save current consumption of the access point.
DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and
multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM
value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1
to 255.
104
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the VMG.
Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the VMG.
Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the VMG.
Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the VMG. The transmission rate of your VMG might be reduced.
Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n

compliant WLAN devices to associate with the VMG. The transmission rate of your VMG
might be reduced.
802.11 Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with
Protection both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This
helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your VMG might be
reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b
Only.
RIFS Select Auto to enable the Reduced Inter-frame Spacing (RIFS) feature. It improves the
Advertisement Device’s performance by reducing the amount of dead time required between OFDM
transmissions. Select Off to disable the feature.
Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short. See
Section 7.10.7 on page 112 for more information.
This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b.
RX Chain Power Select Enable to activate the RX Chain Power Save feature. It turns off one of the Receive
Save chains to save power when it is not in use. Select Disabled to disable this feature.
OBSS Select Enable to allow the coexistence of 20 MHz and 40 MHz Overlapping Basic Service
Coexistence Sets (OBSS) in wireless local area networks. Select Disabled to disable this feature.
XPressTM Select Enable for higher speeds, especially if you have both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE
Technology 802.11g wireless clients. The wireless clients do not have to support XPress™ Technology,
although the performance enhancement is greater if they do. Select Disabled to disable
this feature.
WPS 2.0 Select Enable to support WPS 2.0 which enhances WPS security and flexibility on
configuration. Select Disabled to disable this feature.
7.9 The Channel Status Screen

Use the Channel Status screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click
Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status. The screen appears as shown. Click Scan to
scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Channel Scan Result section.
105
Chapter 7 Wireless
Note: The Scan button only works when the VMG uses 20MHz for the wireless channel
width. You can go to the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen, click the
more link, and then change the channel width setting in the Bandwidth field.
Figure 42 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status

This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see Appendix B on page 308.
7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview

Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.

• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with
numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients,
extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless
clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to
one another in order to exchange information.
106
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 43 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the
access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your
VMG is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For
the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a
variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you
create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of
available channels also varies.
107
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms

The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the VMG’s Web
Configurator.
Table 29 Additional Wireless Terms

TERM DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not
aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP
at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must
sometimes get permission to send information to the VMG. The lower the value, the
more often the devices must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then
wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the VMG.
Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble
modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the VMG
does, it cannot communicate with the VMG.
Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network.
Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger
Threshold threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview

By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this
means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data
passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to
the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to
ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried
on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people
presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the
network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only
people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been
authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired
Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a
determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a
user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have
sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless
network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure
information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random
108
Chapter 7 Wireless
and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use
“70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
7.10.3.1 SSID
Normally, the VMG acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide
the SSID instead, in which case the VMG does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should
change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless
devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that
is sent in the wireless network.
7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter

Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC
address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example,
00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless
network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the VMG which devices are allowed or not allowed to use
the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the
correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless
network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an
authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
7.10.3.3 User Authentication

Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every
device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS
server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network,
even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized
wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and
password to use the wireless network.
1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
109
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.10.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section
7.10.3.3 on page 109 for information about this.)
Table 30 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication

NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
Weakest No Security WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network
supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the VMG and you do not have a
RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two
devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger

encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your VMG, you can also select an option (WPA
compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some
support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the WPA compatible option in the VMG.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
7.10.4 Signal Problems

Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance,
interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference
occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio
transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are
coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when
physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
110
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.10.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a
wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is
disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 44 Basic Service set
7.10.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well
as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The VMG’s
MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to
provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security
modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
7.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs

• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s
communications (but not communicate with each other).
111
Chapter 7 Wireless
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
7.10.7 Preamble Type

Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the VMG uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
7.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)

The VMG can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System)
links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the
security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to
your other access point’s documentation for details.
The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a
wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can
establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1
has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2.
Figure 45 WDS Link Example
WDS
A
AP 1 AP 2
7.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)

Your VMG supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless
network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
112
Chapter 7 Wireless
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
7.10.9.1 Push Button Configuration

WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled
device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in
their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
2 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration
utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the VMG, see
Section 7.6 on page 101).
3 Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the VMG you must press the
WPS button for more than three seconds.
4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
7.10.9.2 PIN Configuration

Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be
static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking
on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure
that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to
activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of
both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client)
into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated
on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends
the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
2 Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this.
113
Chapter 7 Wireless
3 Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the
client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the
VMG, see Section 7.5 on page 99).
4 Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
5 If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can
either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
6 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect,
WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If
you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer)
connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
114
Chapter 7 Wireless
Figure 46 Example WPS Process: PIN Method

ENROLLEE REGISTRAR
WPS
This device’s
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
from other device:
WPS WPS
START START
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
COMMUNICATION
7.10.9.3 How WPS Works

When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts
as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts
as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a
secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used
depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it
sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a
WPS-enabled access point.
115
Chapter 7 Wireless
Figure 47 How WPS works

ACTIVATE ACTIVATE
WPS WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
WPS HANDSHAKE
ENROLLEE REGISTRAR
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two
minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS
transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing
networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the
enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network
and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is
unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a
WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A
configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS
connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset
it to its factory defaults.
7.10.9.4 Example WPS Network Setup

This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1
is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security
information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
116
Chapter 7 Wireless
Figure 48 WPS: Example Network Step 1

ENROLLEE REGISTRAR
SECURITY INFO
CLIENT 1 AP1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar
mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must
connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the
registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies
the existing security information to Client 2.
REGISTRAR
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1 AP1
O
NF
ITYI
ENROLLEE R
CU
SE
CLIENT 2
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you
cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client
2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
117
Chapter 7 Wireless
EXISTING CONNECTION
ION
CLIENT 1 ECT AP1
O NN
GC
IS TIN
EX
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
ENROLLEE
SE
CU
RIT
Y INF
O
AP2
7.10.9.5 Limitations of WPS

WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It
does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices
simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by
pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it
successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to
a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared
key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar
device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you
can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device
must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button
on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled
device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the
“correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices
simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not
have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and
look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the
118
Chapter 7 Wireless
access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a
rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the
MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If
there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
119
C HAPT ER 8
Home Networking
8.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices
are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
LAN
DSL

• Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your
VMG (Section 8.2 on page 122).
• Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 126).
• Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the VMG (Section 8.4 on page
127).
• Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 8.5 on page
129).
• Use the STB Vendor ID screen to configure the Vendor IDs of the connected Set Top Box (STB)
devices, which have the VMG automatically create static DHCP entries for the STB devices when
they request IP addresses (Section 8.6 on page 131).
• Use the Wake on Lan screen to remotely turn on a device on the network. (Section 8.7 on page
131).
• Use the TFTP Server Name screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download
using DHCP option 66. (Section 8.8 on page 132).
120
Chapter 8 Home Networking
8.1.2 What You Need To Know

8.1.2.1 About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your VMG an IP address, subnet
mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a networking device before you can access it.
RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon)

When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers,
RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the
minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix.
IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address.
8.1.2.2 About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping

• Learning public IP addresses
121
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the Chapter 11 on page 160 for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP

The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the VMG allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL

ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD)
1.0.
See Section 8.4.1 on page 128 for examples of installing and using UPnP.
Finding Out More

See Section 8.9 on page 132 for technical background information on LANs.

Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client
List screen.
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen

Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your VMG. Click
Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen.
Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.
1 Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation.
This will become the IP address of your VMG.
2 Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to
leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP
address you entered.
122
3 Click Apply to save your settings.

Figure 51 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface Group
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter
15 on page 184 for how to create a new interface group.
LAN IP Setup
IPv4 Address Enter the LAN IPv4 IP address you want to assign to your VMG in dotted decimal notation,
for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Subnet Mask/ Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example
Prefix Length 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your VMG automatically computes the subnet mask based
on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so.
IGMP Snooping
Status Select the Enable IGMP Snooping checkbox to allows the VMG to passively learn multicast
group.
123
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP Mode Select Standard Mode to have the VMG forward multicast packets to a port that joins the
multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports.
Select Blocking Mode to have the VMG block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN.
DHCP Server State
DHCP Select Enable to have the VMG act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the VMG.
Select DHCP Relay to have the VMG forward DHCP request to the DHCP server.
DHCP Relay This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field.
Server Address
IPv4 Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field.
IP Addressing This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Values
Beginning IP This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Address
Ending IP This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Address
Auto reserve IP Select Enable to have the VMG record DHCP IP addresses with the MAC addresses the IP
for the same addresses are assigned to. The VMG assigns the same IP address to the same MAC address
host when the host requests an IP address again through DHCP.
DHCP Server This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP
Lease Time addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central
computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time,
which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment
to other systems.
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Days/Hours/ Enter the lease time of the DHCP server.
Minutes
DNS Values This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your DNS service provider (From
ISP).
Select DNS Proxy if you have the DNS proxy service. The VMG redirects clients’ DNS
queries to a DNS server for resolving domain names.
Select Static if you have the Static DNS service.

LAN IPv6 Mode Setup
IPv6 State Select Enable to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the VMG.
Link Local Address Type
EUI64 Select this to have the VMG generate an interface ID for the LAN interface’s link-local
address using the EUI-64 format.
Manual Select this to manually enter an interface ID for the LAN interface’s link-local address.
Lan Global Identifier Type
EUI64 Select this to have the VMG generate an interface ID using the EUI-64 format for its global
address .
Manual Select this to manually enter an interface ID for the LAN interface’s global IPv6 address.
LAN IPv6 Address Setup
Delegate prefix Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider
from WAN or an uplink router.
124
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the VMG’s LAN IPv6 address.
MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence
of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast
groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enable MLD Snooping to activate MLD
Snooping on the VMG. This allows the VMG to check MLD packets passing through it and
learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic.
LAN IPv6 Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:
Address Assign
Setup • Stateless: The VMG uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration. RADVD (Router
Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the VMG send IPv6 prefix information in
router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations. DHCPv6 server
is disabled.
• Stateful: The VMG uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The DHCPv6 server is enabled
to have the VMG act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6 addresses to DHCPv6 clients.
• Stateless and Stateful: The VMG uses both IPv6 stateless and stateful
autoconfiguration. The LAN IPv6 clients can obtain IPv6 addresses either through router
advertisements or through DHCPv6.
LAN IPv6 DNS Select how the VMG provide DNS server and domain name information to the clients:
Assign Setup
• From Router Advertisement: The VMG provides DNS information through router
advertisements.
• From DHCPv6 Server: The VMG provides DNS information through DHCPv6.
• From RA & DHCPv6 Server: The VMG provides DNS information through both router
advertisements and DHCPv6.
DHCPv6 Configuration
DHCPv6 State This shows the status of the DHCPv6. DHCP Server displays if you configured the VMG to
act as a DHCPv6 server which assigns IPv6 addresses and/or DNS information to clients.
IPv6 Router Advertisement State
RADVD State This shows whether RADVD is enabled or not.
IPv6 DNS Values
IPv6 DNS Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information.
Server 1-3
Select User-Defined if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server
IPv6 addresses the VMG passes to the DHCP clients.
Select None if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers.

DNS Query Select how the VMG handles clients’ DNS information requests.
Scenario
• IPv4/IPv6 DNS Server: The VMG forwards the requests to both the IPv4 and IPv6
DNS servers and sends clients the first DNS information it receives.
• IPv6 DNS Server Only: The VMG forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server and
sends clients the DNS information it receives.
• IPv4 DNS Server Only: The VMG forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server and
sends clients the DNS information it receives.
• IPv6 DNS Server First: The VMG forwards the requests to the IPv6 DNS server first
and then the IPv4 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives.
• IPv4 DNS Server First: The VMG forwards the requests to the IPv4 DNS server first
and then the IPv6 DNS server. Then it sends clients the first DNS information it receives.
125
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen

This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Use this screen to change your VMG’s static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting > Home
Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen.
Figure 52 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
Table 32 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Static DHCP Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
Configuration
Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the VMG.
MAC Address The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is
unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is
assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other
adapter has a similar address.
IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Modify Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
If you click Static DHCP Configuration in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static
DHCP entry, the following screen displays.
Figure 53 Static DHCP: Static DHCP Configuration/Edit
126
Table 33 Static DHCP: Static DHCP Configuration/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to activate the connection between the client and the VMG.
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings.
See Chapter 15 on page 184 for how to create a new interface group.
IP Type This field displays IPv4 for the type of the DHCP IP address. At the time of writing, it is
not allowed to select other type.
Select Device Info Select a device or computer from the drop-down list or select Manual Input to manually
enter a device’s MAC address and IP address in the following fields.
MAC Address If you select Manual Input, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address If you select Manual Input, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the
computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify.
8.4 The UPnP Screen

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
See page 121 for more information on UPnP.
Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your VMG. Click Network Setting >
Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
Figure 54 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
127
Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP

LABEL DESCRIPTION
UPnP Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open
the web configurator's login screen without entering the VMG's IP address (although you
must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
UPnP NAT-T Select Enable to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the VMG so
that they can communicate through the VMG by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications
automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP
enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP
enabled application.
The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT-T.
# This is the index number of the UPnP NAT-T connection.
Description This is the description of the UPnP NAT-T connection.
Destination IP This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP-enabled device.
Address
External Port This is the external port number that identifies the service.
Internal Port This is the internal port number that identifies the service.
8.4.1 Turning On UPnP in Windows 7 Example

This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows 7. UPnP server is installed in
Windows 7. Activate UPnP on the VMG.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the VMG. Turn on your computer and the
VMG.
1 Click the start icon, Control Panel and then the Network and Sharing Center.
2 Click Change Advanced Sharing Settings.
128
3 Select Turn on network discovery and click Save Changes. Network discovery allows your
computer to find other computers and devices on the network and other computers on the network
to find your computer. This makes it easier to share files and printers.
8.5 The Additional Subnet Screen

Use the Additional Subnet screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same
Ethernet interface. The VMG supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet
129
interface with the VMG itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can
also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet).
If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the VMG may use an LAN IP address that can be
accessed from the WAN.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet to display the screen shown
next.
Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet
Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet

LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Alias Setup
Group Name Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See
Chapter 15 on page 184 for how to create a new interface group.
Active Select Enable to configure a LAN network for the VMG.
IPv4 Address Enter the IP address of your VMG in dotted decimal notation.
Subnet Mask Your VMG will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IPv4 address that you
assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use this value computed by the VMG.
Public LAN
Active Select Enable to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and
Static IP.
IPv4 Address Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP.
Subnet Mask Enter the public IPv4 subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Offer Public IP Select Enable to enable the VMG to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server.
by DHCP
Enable ARP Select Enable to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy.
Proxy
130
8.6 The STB Vendor ID Screen

Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don’t renew their IP addresses
before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an
IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to configure the Vendor IDs of
connected STBs, which have the VMG automatically created static DHCP entries for them when they
request IP addresses.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen.
Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Vendor ID 1~5 These are STB’s Vendor Class Identifiers (DHCP option 60). A Vendor Class Identifier is
usually used to inform the DHCP server a DHCP client’s vendor and functionality.
8.7 The Wake on LAN Screen

Use this screen to turn on a device on the LAN network. To use this feature, the remote device must
also support Wake On LAN.
You need to know the MAC address of the LAN device. It may be on a label on the device or in its
documentation.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on Lan to open this screen.
Figure 57 Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on Lan
131
Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > Wake on Lan

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wake by Select Manual and enter the IP address or MAC address of the device to turn it on remotely.
Address The drop-down list also lists the IP addresses that can be found in the VMG’s ARP table.
Select an IP address and it will then automatically update the IP address and MAC address
in the following fields.
IP Address Enter the IPv4 IP address of the device to turn it on.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the device to turn it on. A MAC address consists of six
hexadecimal character pairs.
Wake up Click this to send a wake up packet to wake up the specified device.
8.8 The TFTP Server Name Screen

Use the TFTP Server Name screen to identify a TFTP server for configuration file download using
DHCP option 66. RFC 2132 defines the option 66 open standard. DHCP option 66 supports the IP
address or the hostname of a single TFTP server.
Click Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name to open this screen.
Figure 58 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name
Table 38 Network Setting > Home Networking > TFTP Server Name
LABEL DESCRIPTION
TFTP Server Enter the the IP address or the hostname of a single TFTP server.
Name

This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
8.9.1 LANs, WANs and the VMG

The actual physical connection determines whether the VMG ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are
two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as
shown next.
132
Figure 59 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
LAN WAN
8.9.2 DHCP Setup

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the VMG as a DHCP server
or disable it. When configured as a server, the VMG provides the TCP/IP configuration for the
clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the
computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The VMG is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the
product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to
your LAN computers.
8.9.3 DNS Server Addresses

DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are
passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when
you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in
the DHCP Setup screen.
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of
IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The VMG supports
the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It
does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If
your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the
DHCP Setup screen.
133
8.9.4 LAN TCP/IP

The VMG has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems
that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask

Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN
share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the VMG.
The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for
private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select
192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the
network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for
instance, 192.168.1.1, for your VMG, but make sure that no other device on your network is using
that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your VMG will compute the
subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the
subnet mask computed by the VMG unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
134
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466,
“Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
135
C HAPT ER 9
Routing
9.1 Overview
The VMG usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to
the Internet. To have the VMG send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use
static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the VMG’s LAN interface. The VMG
routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the VMG’s default gateway (R1). You create one
static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static
route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN.
Figure 60 Example of Routing Topology
A R1
LAN WAN
R3
R2
9.2 The Routing Screen

Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the VMG. Click Network Setting >
Routing > Static Route to open the following screen.
Figure 61 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route
136
Chapter 9 Routing
Table 39 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new static Click this to configure a new static route.
route
Status This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active.
Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number.
Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Interface This is the WAN interface used for this static route.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the VMG.
Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the VMG. A window displays asking you
to confirm that you want to delete the route.
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route

Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new static route in the Routing screen or
the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 62 Routing: Add/Edit
Table 40 Routing: Add/Edit (Sheet 1 of 2)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to
delete the entry.
Route Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route.
IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6.
Destination IP Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination.
Address
137
Chapter 9 Routing
Table 40 Routing: Add/Edit (Sheet 2 of 2)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Subnet Mask If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of
255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to
the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Use Gateway IP The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN
Address port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Enable.

Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Address
Use Interface Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route.
9.3 The DNS Route Screen

Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the VMG. Click Network Setting > Routing
> DNS Route to open the following screen.
Figure 63 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route
Table 41 Network Setting > Routing > DNS Route

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New DNS Click this to add a new DNS route.
Route
# This is the index number of a DNS route.
Status This field displays whether the DNS route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
DNS route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not active.
Domain Name This is the host name or domain name of the DNS route entry.
Interface This is the WAN connection through which the VMG forwards DNS requests for this domain
name.
Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask of the DNS route entry.
Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the DNS route.
Click the Delete icon to delete the DNS route.
9.3.1 The DNS Route Add Screen

You can manually add the VMG’s DNS route entry. Click Add New DNS Route in the Network
Setting > Routing > DNS Route screen. The screen shown next appears.
138
Chapter 9 Routing
Figure 64 DNS Route Add
Table 42 DNS Route Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to activate this DNS route.
Domain Name Enter the domain name of the DNS route entry.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the DNS route entry.
WAN Interface Select the WAN connection through which the VMG forwards DNS requests for this domain
name. WWAN means the wireless 3G interface.
OK Click this to save your changes.
Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes.
9.4 The Policy Route Screen

Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the VMG takes the shortest path
to forward a packet. Policy route allows the VMG to override the default routing behavior and alter
the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based
routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.
You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different
connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing.
The Policy Route screen let you view and configure routing policies on the VMG. Click Network
Setting > Routing > Policy Route to open the following screen.
Figure 65 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Route
Table 43 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Route

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Policy Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule.
Route
139
Chapter 9 Routing
Table 43 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Route (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field displays whether the DNS route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
DNS route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this DNS route is not active.
Name This is the name of the rule.
Source IP This is the source IP address.
Source Subnet his is the source subnet mask address.
Mask
Protocol This is the transport layer protocol.
Source Port This is the source port number.
Source MAC This is the source MAC address.
Source This is the interface from which the matched traffic is sent.
Interface
WAN Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this policy.
Click the Delete icon to remove a policy from the VMG. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the policy.
9.4.1 Add/Edit Policy Route

Click Add New Policy Route in the Policy Route screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy. Use
this screen to configure the required information for a policy route.
Figure 66 Policy Route: Add/Edit
Table 44 Policy Route: Add/Edit (Sheet 1 of 2)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select this to activate this policy route.
Route Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Source IP Enter the source IP address.
Source Subnet Enter the source subnet mask address.
Mask
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
140
Chapter 9 Routing
Table 44 Policy Route: Add/Edit (Sheet 2 of 2)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source Port Enter the source port number.
Source MAC Enter the source MAC address.
Source Type the name of the interface from which the matched traffic is sent.
Interface
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN
interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens.
9.5 RIP
Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing
information with other routers.
9.5.1 The RIP Screen

Click Network Setting > Routing > RIP to open the RIP screen.
Figure 67 RIP
Table 45 RIP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP
packets that the VMG sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP
version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP
version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual
network topology.
Operation Select Passive to have the VMG update the routing table based on the RIP
packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other
routers in this interface.
Select Active to have the VMG advertise its route information and also listen for
routing updates from neighboring routers.
Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings.
141
C HAPTER 10
Quality of Service (QoS)
10.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is
equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network
performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-
demand.
Configure QoS on the VMG to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The VMG assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a
high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing
time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those
that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as Voice
over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet
radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.

• The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section
10.3 on page 144).
• The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 145).
• The Classification Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on
page 147).
• The Shaper Setup screen limits outgoing traffic transmission rate on the selected interface
• The Policer Setup screen to control incoming traffic transmission rate and bursts (Section 10.7
on page 153).
142
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.2 What You Need to Know

The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
QoS versus Cos

QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given
the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping
similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different
priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS).
IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol
and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking

In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value,
IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes
through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide
specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.
Traffic Shaping
Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted
with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your VMG uses the Token
Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate.
Traffic Rate Traffic Rate

Traffic
Traffic
Time Time
(Before Traffic Shaping) (After Traffic Shaping)
143
Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the
basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined
criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.
Traffic Rate Traffic Rate

Traffic
Traffic
Time Time
(Before Traffic Policing) (After Traffic Policing)
The VMG supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single
Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions
which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.8 on page 155 for more information on
each metering algorithm.
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen

Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 10.1 on
page 142 for more information.
Figure 68 Network Settings > QoS > General
144
Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > General

LABEL DESCRIPTION
QoS Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.
WAN Managed Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate
Upstream using QoS.
Bandwidth
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces’ actual transmission speed.
For example, set the WAN interfaces’ speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has
an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps.
You can set this number higher than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. The VMG
uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this
number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will
cause the VMG to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the VMG automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN
interfaces’ actual upstream transmission speed.
LAN Managed Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that
Downstream you want to allocate using QoS.
Bandwidth
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission
speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you
use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection.
You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This
will cause the VMG to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the VMG automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces’ maximum
supported connection speed.
Upstream Select how the VMG assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows.
traffic priority
Assigned by • None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the VMG put packets into the queues
according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the
classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority.
• Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level.
• IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS
field in the IP header.
• Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets
get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time
packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like
file transfers.
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen

Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
145
Figure 69 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup
Table 47 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Queue Click this button to create a new queue entry.
Status This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.
Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface This shows the name of the VMG’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes.
Priority This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight This shows the weight of this queue.
Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
Management
Queue management algorithms determine how the VMG should handle packets when it
receives too many (network congestion).
Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by
one when you take this action.
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue

Click Add New Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue.
Figure 70 Queue Setup: Add
146
Table 48 Queue Setup: Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.

Priority Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority
queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
Weight Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the VMG divides the bandwidth across the
queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than
queues with smaller weights.
Buffer This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management
Management algorithm that allows the VMG buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once
the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again
(packets are transmitted out of it).
Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.
10.5 The Classification Setup Screen

Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows
according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number,
destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select
traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the VMG forwards out through the WAN interface.
Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority
to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup to open the following screen.
Figure 71 Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup
147
Table 49 Network Setting > QoS > Classification Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Click this to create a new classifier.
Classification
Order This is the index number of the entry. The classifiers are applied in order of their
numbering.
Status This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active.
Class Name This is the name of the classifier.
Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which
Criteria traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this
classifier.
DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P Mark This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier.
VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move
up by one when you take this action.
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class

Click Add New Classification in the Classification Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a
classifier to open the following screen.
148
Figure 72 Classification Setup: Add/Edit
Table 50 Classification Setup: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Step1: Class Configuration
Enable Select this to enable this classifier.
Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to
the number you selected after clicking Apply.
Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.
149
Table 50 Classification Setup: Add/Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Step2: Criteria Configuration
From Interface If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From
Interface drop-down list box.
Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.
If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address,
DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level.

Source
Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet Enter the source subnet mask.
Mask
Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Destination
Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet Enter the source subnet mask.
Mask
Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Others
Service This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined

application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the
filter fields.
Protocol This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If
you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type) number.
150

LABEL DESCRIPTION
DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class Identifier
(Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
If you select Client ID (DHCP Option 61), enter the Identity Association IDentifier (IAD
Option 61) of the matched traffic, such as the MAC address of the device.
If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the user’s
category or application type in the matched DHCP packets.
If you select Vendor Specific Info (DHCP Option 125), enter the vendor specific
information of the matched traffic, such as the product class, model name, and serial
number of the device.
Packet This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Length
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in
the fields provided.
DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the
field provided.
802.1P This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.

VLAN ID This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number.

TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge)
flag.
Step3: Packet Modification
DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select Remark, enter a DSCP value with which the VMG replaces the DSCP field in
the packets.
If you select Unchange, the VMG keep the DSCP field in the packets.
802.1P Mark Select a priority level with which the VMG replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the
packets.
If you select Unchange, the VMG keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets.
VLAN ID If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the VMG replaces the VLAN ID of
the frames.
If you select Remove, the VMG deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them
out.
If you select Add, the VMG treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID.
If you select Unchange, the VMG keep the VLAN ID in the packets.
Step4: Class Routing
Forward to Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select
Interface Unchange, the VMG forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table.
151

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Step5: Outgoing Queue Selection
To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already.
10.6 The QoS Shaper Setup Screen

This screen shows that you can use the token bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large
bursts while keeping a limit for processing outgoing traffic at the average rate. Click Network
Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 73 Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup
Table 51 Network Setting > QoS > Shaper Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Click this to create a new entry.
Shaper
Status This field displays whether the shaper is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this shaper is not active.
Outgoing This shows the name of the VMG's interface through which traffic in this shaper applies.
Interface
Rate Limit This shows the average rate limit of traffic bursts for this shaper.
(kbps)
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the shaper.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing shaper. Note that subsequent rules move up by
152
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Shaper

Click Add New Shaper in the Shaper Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a shaper to show the
following screen.
Figure 74 Shaper Setup: Add/Edit
Table 52 Shaper Setup: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select the check box to activate this shaper.
Outgoing Select the VMG's interface through which traffic in this shaper applies
Interface
Rate Limit Enter the average rate limit of traffic bursts for this shaper.
10.7 The QoS Policer Setup Screen

Use this screen to view QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic
and apply actions, such as drop, pass, or modify the DSCP value for matched traffic. Click Network
Setting > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 75 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup
153
Table 53 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Policer Click this to create a new entry.
Status This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active.
Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer.
Regulated This field displays the name of a QoS classifier
Classes
Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer.
Rule These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the
member QoS classes.
Action This shows the how the policer has the VMG treat different types of traffic belonging to the
policer’s member QoS classes.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the policer.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by
10.7.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer

Click Add New Policer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the
following screen.
Figure 76 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
154
Table 54 Policer Setup: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the check box to activate this policer.
Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer.
Meter Type This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer.
The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be
transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes
which is also the bucket size.
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the
Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the
Peak Information Rate (PIR).
Committed Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is
Rate less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic.
Committed Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the
Burst Size peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also
configured.
This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm.
Conforming Specify what the VMG does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (green-
Action marked packets).
• Pass: Send the packets without modification.

• DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use.
Non- Specify what the VMG does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and
Conforming burst size (red-marked packets).
Action
• Drop: Discard the packets.
• DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network.
Available Class Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier.
Selected Class Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the
Selected Class box.
To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button.

The following section contains additional technical information about the VMG features described in
this chapter.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag

The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user
155
priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that
devices need to process the frame across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The
following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates
the 802.1p).
Table 55 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type

PRIORITY TRAFFIC TYPE
LEVEL
Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).
Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4 Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3 Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include
important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2 This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1 This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that
are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0 Typically used for best-effort traffic.
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the
same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet
types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they
receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on
the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs)
indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network
devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have
to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior

DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field
in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define
up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet
gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP
values and the configured policies.
156
IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a
layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP
header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is
the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
Automatic Priority Queue Assignment

If you enable QoS on the VMG, the VMG can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP
precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class.
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the VMG. On the
VMG, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index
queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Table 56 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping

LAYER 2 LAYER 3
PRIORITY IEEE 802.1P USER

QUEUE PRIORITY TOS (IP IP PACKET
DSCP
(ETHERNET PRECEDENCE) LENGTH (BYTE)
PRIORITY)
0 1 0 000000
1 2
2 0 0 000000 >1100
3 3 1 001110 250~1100
001100
001010
001000
4 4 2 010110
010100
010010
010000
5 5 3 011110 <250
011100
011010
011000
6 6 4 100110
100100
100010
100000
5 101110
101000
7 7 6 110000
7 111000
157
Token Bucket
The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The
bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b
bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated
and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:
• A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the
size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the bucket.
• If there are no tokens in the bucket, the VMG stops transmitting until enough tokens are
generated.
• If not enough tokens are available, the VMG treats the packet in either one of the following ways:
In traffic shaping:
• Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket.
In traffic policing:
• Drops it.
• Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The VMG may drop these marked packets if the network is
overloaded.
Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface
can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface’s capability. The smaller
the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be
dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10
kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps.
Single Rate Three Color Marker
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens
are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate
(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS).
All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green.
Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it
exceeds the EBS then it is marked red.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:
• A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in
the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the CBS bucket.
158
• If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the VMG checks the EBS bucket. The packet is
marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked
red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.
Two Rate Three Color Marker
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are
admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based
on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider
and client.
The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size
(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR
and PIR respectively.
All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it
is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the
CIR then it is marked green.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:
• A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in
bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens
are removed if the packet is dropped.
• If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the VMG checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked
green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater
than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow.
159
C HAPTER 11
Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the VMG. NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT,
RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address
of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another
network.

• Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s)
on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 161).
• Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local
network (Section 11.3 on page 164).
• Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the VMG’s trigger port settings (Section
11.4 on page 165).
• Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.5 on page 168).
• Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the VMG (Section 11.6
on page 168).
• Use the Address Mapping screen to configure the VMG's address mapping settings (Section
11.7 on page 169).
• Use the Sessions screen to configure the VMG's maximum number of NAT sessions (Section
11.7 on page 169).
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the VMG, for example, the computers of
your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
160
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network
appear as a single computer to the outside world.
Finding Out More

See Section 11.9 on page 171 for advanced technical information on NAT.
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen

Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your
local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP
address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to
specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or
a range of ports.
The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix D on page 329. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)

Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
161
Figure 77 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
LAN WAN
B=192.168.1.34
192.168.1.1
IP Address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.3
D=192.168.1.36
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.
See Appendix D on page 329 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Figure 78 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Rule Click this to add a new rule.
Status This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This shows the service’s name.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
WAN IP This field displays the incoming packet’s destination IP address.
Server IP This is the server’s IP address.
Address
Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
Translation This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
Start Port
Translation End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
Port
Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UDP, or TCP/
UDP.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
162
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding

Click Add New Rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule
to open the following screen.
Figure 79 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
Table 58 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Clear the checkbox to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
WAN IP Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined. If the packet’s
destination IP address doesn’t match the one specified here, the port forwarding rule will
not be applied.
Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in
the End Port field.
End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then
enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port
number in the Start Port field above.
Translation This shows the port number to which you want the VMG to translate the incoming port. For
Start Port a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports
translated.
Translation End This shows the last port of the translated port range.
Port
163
Table 58 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Address
Protocol Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
11.3 The Applications Screen

This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this
screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones.
To access this screen, click Network Setting > NAT > Applications. The following screen
appears.
Figure 80 Network Setting > NAT > Applications
Table 59 Network Setting > NAT > Applications

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Click this to add a new NAT application rule.
Application
Application This field shows the type of application that the service forwards.
Forwarded
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Server IP This field displays the destination IP address for the service.
Address
Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the rule.
11.3.1 Add New Application

This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add New Application in the
Applications screen to open the following screen.
164
Figure 81 Applications: Add
Table 60 Applications: Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to.
Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the application here.
Address
Application Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box.
Category
Application Select a service from the drop-down list box and the VMG automatically configures the
Forwarded protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service.
View Rule Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application
Fowarded.
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen

Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on
the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service
(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN).
The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN
computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take
turns using the service. The VMG records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the
WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the
VMG's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the
VMG forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that
computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in
the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a
different LAN computer to use the application.
For example:
165
Figure 82 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
2 Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the VMG to record Jane’s computer IP address. The VMG
associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.
3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
4 The VMG forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The VMG
times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer
Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen to
view your VMG’s trigger port settings.
Figure 83 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering
Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Rule Click this to create a new rule.
Status This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule.
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Trigger Start The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the VMG to record
Port the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.

Trigger End This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Port
Trigger Proto. This is the trigger transport layer protocol.
166
Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The VMG forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the
client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.

Open End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Open Proto. This is the open transport layer protocol.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule

This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering
screen or click a rule’s Edit icon to open the following screen.
Figure 84 Port Triggering: Add/Edit
Table 62 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select the check box to enable this rule.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.
Trigger Start The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the VMG to record
Port the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger End Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Port
Trigger Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
167
Table 62 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Open Start Port The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The VMG forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the
client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
11.5 The DMZ Screen

In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup
screen.
Figure 85 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
Table 63 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not
Address specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the VMG discards all packets received
for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
11.6 The ALG Screen

Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls
to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream.
When the VMG registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the VMG’s private IP
address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an
outbound proxy if your VMG is behind a SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the VMG. To access this
screen, click Network Setting > NAT > ALG.
168
Figure 86 Network Setting > NAT > ALG
Table 64 Network Setting > NAT > ALG

LABEL DESCRIPTION
NAT ALG Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work
correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.
SIP ALG Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-
mapping rules.
RTSP ALG Enable this to have the VMG detect RTSP traffic and help build RTSP sessions through its
NAT. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
11.7 The Address Mapping Screen

Ordering your rules is important because the VMG applies the rules in the order that you specify.
When a rule matches the current packet, the VMG takes the corresponding action and the
remaining rules are ignored.
Click Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping to display the following screen.
Figure 87 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping
Table 65 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new rule Click this to create a new rule.
Set This is the index number of the address mapping set.
Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
Local End IP This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types.
Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type.
Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and
Many-to-One mapping types.
169
Table 65 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type This is the address mapping type.
One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the VMG's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Wan Interface This is the WAN interface to which the address mapping rule applies.
Name
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent
address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.
11.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule

To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add new rule or the rule’s edit icon in the Address
Mapping screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 88 Address Mapping: Add/Edit
Table 66 Address Mapping: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Type Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following.
One-to-One: This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
Many-to-One: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the VMG's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
Many-to-Many: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Local Start IP Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
170
Table 66 Address Mapping: Add/Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Local End IP Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for One-to-One mapping types.
Global Start IP Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the Many-to-One mapping type.
Global End IP Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for One-to-One and
Many-to-One mapping types.
Set Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure.
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface to which the address mapping rule applies.
11.8 The Sessions Screen

Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions a client can use. Click Network
Setting > NAT > Sessions to display the following screen.
Figure 89 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions
Table 67 Network Setting > NAT > Sessions

LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAX NAT Use this field to set a limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client host can
Session Per have.
Host
If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve
their performance. With heavy peer-to-peer application use, lower this number to ensure no
single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions.
Apply Click this to save your changes on this screen.
Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving any changes.

This part contains more information regarding NAT.
171
11.9.1 NAT Definitions

Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the VMG, for example, the computers of
your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address
of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in
a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP
address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table
summarizes this information.
Table 68 NAT Definitions

ITEM DESCRIPTION
Inside This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside This refers to the host on the WAN.
Local This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
LAN.
Global This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
WAN.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
11.9.2 What NAT Does

In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-
to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall
protection. With no servers defined, your VMG filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing
intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC
1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
172
11.9.3 How NAT Works

Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
VMG keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have
their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 90 How NAT Works

NAT Table
LAN Inside Local Inside Global
IP Address IP Address WAN
192.168.1.10 IGA 1
192.168.1.13 192.168.1.11 IGA 2
192.168.1.12 IGA 3
192.168.1.13 IGA 4
192.168.1.12 SA SA
192.168.1.10 IGA1
Inside Local Inside Global

Address (ILA) Address (IGA)
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.10
11.9.4 NAT Application

The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs
using IP alias) behind the VMG can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
173
Figure 91 NAT Application With IP Alias
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers

The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for
further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples
and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Table 69 Services and Port Numbers

SERVICES PORT NUMBER
ECHO 7
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 21
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 25
DNS (Domain Name System) 53
Finger 79
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web) 80
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) 110
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) 119
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 161
SNMP trap 162
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) 1723
Port Forwarding Example

Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
174
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 92 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example

A=192.168.1.33
192.168.1.1
B=192.168.1.34
IP address assigned by ISP

C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36
175
C HAPTER 12
Dynamic DNS Setup
12.1 Overview
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a machine before you can access it.
In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static
or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain
domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The VMG uses a system DNS
server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not
match any DNS routing entry. After the VMG receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it creates a
new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table.
Dynamic DNS
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic
DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access
your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for
people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name.
The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.

• Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page
177).
• Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the VMG
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
176
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
12.2 The DNS Entry Screen

Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the VMG. Click Network Setting > DNS to
open the DNS Entry screen.
Figure 93 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry
Table 70 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New DNS Click this to create a new DNS entry.
Entry
Hostname This indicates the host name or domain name.
IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry

You can manually add or edit the VMG’s DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add New DNS
Entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen
shown next appears.
Figure 94 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
177
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
Table 71 DNS Entry: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name Enter the host name of the DNS entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the DNS entry.
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen

Use this screen to change your VMG’s DDNS. Click Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 95 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS
Table 72 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS Setup
Dynamic DNS Select Enable to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box.
Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your VMG by your Dynamic DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
Username Type your user name.
Password Type the password assigned to you.
Dynamic DNS Status
User This shows Success if the account is correctly set up with the Dynamic DNS provider
Authentication account.
Result
Last Updated This shows the last time the IP address the Dynamic DNS provider has associated
Time with the hostname was updated.
Current Dynamic This shows the IP address your Dynamic DNS provider has currently associated with
IP the hostname.
178
C HAPTER 13
IGMP/MLD
13.1 Overview
Use the IGMP/MLD screen to configure IGMP/MLD group settings.
Multicast and IGMP

See Multicast on page 88 for more information.
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD)

The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
• MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
• MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
• MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
• An MLD Report message is equivalent to an IGMP Report message, and a MLD Done message is
equivalent to an IGMP Leave message.
IGMP Fast Leave

When a host leaves a multicast group (224.1.1.1), it sends an IGMP leave message to inform all
routers (224.0.0.2) in the multicast group. When a router receives the leave message, it sends a
specific query message to all multicast group (224.1.1.1) members to check if any other hosts are
still in the group. Then the router deletes the host’s information.
With the IGMP fast leave feature enabled, the router removes the host’s information from the group
member list once it receives a leave message from a host and the fast leave timer expires.
13.2 The IGMP/MLD Screen

Use this screen to configure multicast groups the VMG has joined and which ports have joined it. To
open this screen, click Network Setting > IGMP/MLD.
179
Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD
Figure 96 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD
Table 73 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD

LABEL DESCRIPTION
IGMP/MLD Configuration
Default Version Enter the version of IGMP (1~3) and MLD (1~2) that you want the VMG to use on the WAN.
Query Interval Enter the number of seconds the VMG sends a query message to hosts to get the group
membership information.
Query Enter the maximum number of seconds the VMG can wait for receiving a General Query
Response message. Multicast routers use general queries to learn which multicast groups have
Interval members.
Last Member Enter the maximum number of seconds the VMG can wait for receiving a response to a
Query Interval Group-Specific Query message. Multicast routers use group-specific queries to learn
whether any member remains in a specific multicast group.
Robustness Enter the number of times (1~7) the VMG can resend a packet if packet loss occurs due to
Value network congestion.
Maximum Enter a number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface on the VMG is allowed
Multicast to join. Once a multicast member is registered in the specified number of multicast groups,
Groups any new IGMP or MLD join report frames are dropped by the interface.
Maximum Enter a number to limit the number of multicast data sources (1-24) a multicast group is
Multicast Data allowed to have.
Sources
Note: The setting only works for IGMPv3 and MLDv2.
180
Chapter 13 IGMP/MLD
Table 73 Network Setting > IGMP/MLD (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Maximum Enter a number to limit the number of multicast members a multicast group can have.
Multicast Group
Members
Fast Leave Select this option to set the VMG to remove a port from the multicast tree immediately
Enable (without sending an IGMP or MLD membership query message) once it receives an IGMP or
MLD leave message. This is helpful if a user wants to quickly change a TV channel (multicast
group change) especially for IPTV applications.
LAN to LAN Select this to enable LAN to LAN IGMP snooping capability.
(Intra LAN)
Multicast
Enable
Membership Select this to have the VMG add a host to a multicast group immediately once the VMG
Join Immediate receives an IGMP or MLD join message.
(IPTV)
181
C HAPTER 14
Vlan Group
14.1 Overview
Virtual LAN IDs are used to identify different traffic types over the same physical link.
In the following example, the VMG (DSL) can use VLAN IDs (VID) 100 and 200 to identify Video-on-
Demand and IPTV traffic respectively coming from the two VoD and IPTV multicast servers. The
VMG (DSL) can also tag outgoing requests to these servers with these VLAN IDs.
Figure 97 VLAN Group Example

Use these screens to group separate VLAN groups together to be treated as one VLAN group.
14.2 The Vlan Group Screen

Click Network Setting > Vlan Group to open the following screen.
Figure 98 Network Setting > Vlan Group
182
Chapter 14 Vlan Group
Table 74 Network Setting > Vlan Group

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Vlan Click this button to create a new VLAN group.
Group
# This is the index number of the VLAN group.
Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the VLAN group.
VLAN ID This shows the unique ID number that identifies the VLAN group.
Interfaces This shows the LAN ports included in the VLAN group and if traffic leaving the port will be
tagged with the VLAN ID.
Modify Click the Edit icon to change an existing VLAN group setting or click the Delete icon to
remove the VLAN group.
14.2.1 Add/Edit a VLAN Group

Click the Add New VLAN Group button in the Vlan Group screen to open the following screen.
Use this screen to create a new VLAN group.
Figure 99 Add/Edit VLAN Group
Table 75 Add/Edit VLAN Group

LABEL DESCRIPTION
VLAN Group Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters,
Name numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.
VLAN ID Enter a unique ID number, from 1 to 4,094, to identify this VLAN group. Outgoing traffic is
tagged with this ID if Txtagging is selected below.
LAN Select Include to add the associated LAN interface to this VLAN group.
Select Txtagging to tag outgoing traffic from the associated LAN port with the VLAN ID
number entered above.
Note: LAN5 displays if the WAN port was configured as a LAN port in the Home Networking
> 5th Ethernet port screen.
183
C HAPTER 15
Interface Grouping
15.1 Overview
By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the VMG are in the same group and can communicate
with each other. Create interface groups to have the VMG assign the IP addresses in different
domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the VMG. This lets
devices connected to an interface group’s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface
group’s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces.

The Interface Grouping screens let you create multiple networks on the VMG (Section 15.2 on
page 184).
15.2 The Interface Grouping Screen

You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the VMG
automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an
interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface
group.
Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the VMG assigns to
the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the VMG to assign IP addresses
based on the client’s DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and
configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 8 on page
120 for more information.
In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT
5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses
the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface.
184
Chapter 15 Interface Grouping
Figure 100 Interface Grouping Application
Default: ETH 2~4

192.168.1.x/24
eth10.0
Internet
VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1
192.168.2.x/24
DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0
Click Network Setting > Interface Grouping to open the following screen.
Figure 101 Network Setting > Interface Grouping
Table 76 Network Setting > Interface Grouping

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Click this button to create a new interface group.
Interface Group
Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.
LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.
Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the group.
Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the group.
Add Click this button to create a new group.
15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration

Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Grouping screen to open the
following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group.
Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time.
185
Figure 102 Interface Group Configuration
Table 77 Interface Group Configuration

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Group Name Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters,
numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface, up to
used in the one ATM interface, up to one ETH interface, and and up to one WWAN interface.
grouping
Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group.
Grouped LAN Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Available
Interfaces LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces
list to add the interfaces to this group.
Available LAN
Interfaces To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces, use the
right-facing arrow.
Automatically Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of
Add Clients the hardware or firmware. See Section 15.2.2 on page 187 for more information.
With the
following DHCP
Vendor IDs
# This shows the index number of the rule.
Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received
will belong to this group automatically.
WildCard This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled.
Support
Remove Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the VMG.
186
Table 77 Interface Group Configuration (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
15.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria

Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following
screen.
Figure 103 Interface Grouping Criteria
Table 78 Interface Grouping Criteria

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source MAC Enter the source MAC address of the packet.
Address
DHCP Option Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic,
60 such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
Enable Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for
wildcard on DHCP option 60.
DHCP
option 60
option
DHCP Option Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic.
61
IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN
connection index number.
187
Table 78 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
DUID type Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware
type, a time value and the MAC address of the device.
Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the
vendor’s registered enterprise number.
Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the device’s hardware type
and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields.
Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field.
DHCP Option Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic.
125
Enterprise Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned
Number Numbers Authority).
Manufactur Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes
er OUI of the MAC address.
Product Enter the product class of the device.
Class
Model Enter the model name of the device.
Name
Serial Enter the serial number of the device.
Number
188
C HAPTER 16
USB Service
16.1 Overview
You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your VMG with users on your
network.
The following figure is an overview of the VMG’s file server feature. Computers A and B can access
files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the VMG.
Figure 104 File Sharing Overview

B
C
The VMG will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set
up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network
administrator.

• Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 16.1.3 on page 190).
• Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 16.3 on
page 192).
16.1.2 ().What You Need To Know

189
Chapter 16 USB Service
16.1.2.1 About File Sharing
Workgroup name
This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources
such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a
network.
Shares
When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the VMG is given a folder, called a
“share”. If a USB hard drive connected to the VMG has more than one partition, then each partition
will be allocated a share. You can also configure a “share” to be a sub-folder or file on the USB
device.
File Systems
A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often
different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing
feature on your VMG supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32.
Common Internet File System

The VMG uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS
compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the VMG. CIFS protocol
is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to your
systems specifications for CIFS compatibility).

Make sure the VMG is connected to your network and turned on.
1 Connect the USB device to one of the VMG’s USB port. Make sure the VMG is connected to your
network.
2 The VMG detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are
connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected
to an appropriate power source that is on.
Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the VMG, see the troubleshooting for
suggestions.
16.2 The File Sharing Screen

Use this screen to set up file sharing through the VMG. The VMG’s LAN users can access the shared
folder (or share) from the USB device inserted in the VMG. To access this screen, click Network
Setting > USB Service > File Sharing.
190
Figure 105 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing
Table 79 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Information
Volume This is the volume name the VMG gives to an inserted USB device.
Capacity This is the total available memory size (in megabytes) on the USB device.
Used Space This is the memory size (in megabytes) already used on the USB device.
Server Configuration
File Sharing Select Enable to activate file sharing through the VMG.
Services
Account Management
Add New User Click this button to create a user account to access the secured shares.
Active Select this to allow the user to access the secured shares.
Status This field shows the status of the user.
: The user account is not activated for the share.
: The user account is activated for the share.

User Name This is the name of a user who is allowed to access the secured shares on the USB device.
Modify Click the Edit icon to modify the user account.
Click the Delete icon to remove the user account from the VMG.
Apply Click this to save your changes to the VMG.
Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
16.2.1 The Add New User Screen

Use this screen to create a user account that can access the secured shares on the USB device. To
access this screen, click the Add New User button in the Network Setting > USB Service > File
Sharing screen.
191
Figure 106 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing > Add new user
Table 80 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing > Add new user
LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter a user name. You can enter up to 16 characters. Only letters and numbers allowed.
New Password Enter the password used to access the secured share. The password must be 5 to 15
characters long. Only letters and numbers are allowed. The password is case sensitive.
Retype New Retype the password that you entered above.
Password
Apply Click this to save your changes to the VMG.
Back Click this to return to the previous screen.
16.3 The Media Server Screen

The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB
storage device connected to your VMG (without having to copy them to another computer). The
VMG can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The VMG streams files to DLNA-compliant
media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of
personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home
network.
The VMG media server enables you to:
• Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the
VMG.
• Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files.
Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user
name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled
by default with the video, photo, and music shares published.
To change your VMG’s media server settings, click Network Setting > USB Service > Media
Server. The screen appears as shown.
192
Figure 107 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 81 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Media Server Select Enable to have the VMG function as a DLNA-compliant media server.
Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media
files located in the shares.
Interface Select an interface on which you want to enable the media server function.
Media Library Enter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to
Path the VMG.
193
C HAPTER 17
Firewall
17.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the VMG’s security settings. Use the firewall to
protect your VMG and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By
default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant
Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2).
However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 108 Default Firewall Action
LAN WAN
1
A 2
3
4

• Use the General screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the VMG (Section 17.2
on page 195).
• Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall
rules (Section 17.3 on page 196).
• Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section
17.4 on page 198).
• Use the DoS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 17.5
on page 200).
194
Chapter 17 Firewall
SYN Attack
A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the
targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that
follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-
ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates
the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests,
making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the
Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer
have access to network resources. The VMG is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all
known DoS attacks.
DDoS
A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby
causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.
LAND Attack
In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of
the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making
the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.
Ping of Death
Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum
65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or
reboot.
SPI
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is
valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the
WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
17.2 The Firewall Screen

Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the VMG. Firewall rules are grouped based
on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
Click Security > Firewall to display the General screen.
195
Chapter 17 Firewall
Figure 109 Security > Firewall > General
Table 82 Security > Firewall > General

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Firewall Select Enable to activate the firewall feature on the VMG.
Easy Select Easy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Medium Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions.
High Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
17.3 The Protocol Screen

You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen. For a
comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number
Authority) website. See Appendix D on page 329 for some examples.
Click Security > Firewall > Protocol to display the following screen.
Figure 110 Security > Firewall > Protocol
196
Chapter 17 Firewall
Table 83 Security > Firewall > Protocol

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new Click this to add a new service.
service entry
Name This is the name of your customized service.
Description This is the description of your customized service.
Ports/Protocol This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range
Number of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the
service uses another IP protocol.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the entry.
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
17.3.1 Add/Edit a Service

Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall’s ACL rule
configuration. Click Add new service entry or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the
Service screen to display the following screen.
Figure 111 Service: Add/Edit
197
Chapter 17 Firewall
Table 84 Service: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Protocol Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port from
the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number.
Source/ These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port.
Destination Port
Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your
customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports.
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized
service.
Protocol This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol.
Number
Enter the protocol number of your customized port.
Add Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below.
Rule List
Protocol This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port.
Ports/Protocol For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that
Number defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number.
Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the rule.
Service Name Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for
your customized port.
Service Enter a description for your customized port.
Description
17.4 The Access Control Screen

Click Security > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a
list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules.
Figure 112 Security > Firewall > Access Control
Table 85 Security > Firewall > Access Control

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New ACL Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic.
Rule
Name This displays the name of the rule.
Src IP This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank
source address is equivalent to Any.
198
Chapter 17 Firewall
Table 85 Security > Firewall > Access Control (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dst IP This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a
blank destination address is equivalent to Any.
Service This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic
to which this rule applies.
Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and
sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender
(REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT).
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one
when you take this action.
Click the Move To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field.
17.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule

Click Add new ACL rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control
screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 113 Access Control: Add/Edit
Table 86 Access Control: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces,
underscores, and dashes.
You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing
the ACL rule.
Order Select the order of the ACL rule.
199
Chapter 17 Firewall
Table 86 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select Source Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address,
Device enter the source IP address in the field below.
Source IP Enter the source IP address.
Address
Select Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP
Destination Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below.
Device
Destination IP Enter the destination IP address.
Address
IP Type Select whether your IP type is IPv4 or IPv6.
Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down
list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security > Firewall > Service >
Add screen display in this list.
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Service.

Protocol This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or ICMPv6) that defines your customized
port from the drop-down list box.
Custom Source This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Port
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
Custom This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select Protocol.
Destination Port
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination.
Policy Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP
destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of
(ACCEPT) packets that match this rule.
Direction Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.
Enable Rate Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the
Limit specified protocol.
Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is.
Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a
new schedule rule by click Add New Rule. This will bring you to the Security > Scheduler
Rules screen.
17.5 The DoS Screen

DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and
connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access
becomes unavailable.
Use the DoS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Security > Firewall > DoS
to display the following screen.
200
Chapter 17 Firewall
Figure 114 Security > Firewall > DoS
Table 87 Security > Firewall > DoS

LABEL DESCRIPTION
DoS Protection Select Enable to enable protection against DoS attacks.
Blocking
Deny Ping Select Enable to block ping request packets.
Response
201
C HAPTER 18
MAC Filter
18.1 Overview
You can configure the VMG to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC
Filter screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique
MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC
addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
18.2 The MAC Filter Screen

Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the VMG. Click Security > MAC Filter.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 115 Security > MAC Filter
202
Chapter 18 MAC Filter
Table 88 Security > MAC Filter

LABEL DESCRIPTION
MAC Address Filter Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function.
MAC Restrict Mode Select Allow to only permit the listed MAC addresses access to the VMG. Select Deny
to permit anyone access to the VMG except the listed MAC addresses.
Set This is the index number of the MAC address.
Allow Select Allow to enable the MAC filter rule. . The rule will not be applied if Allow is not
selected.
Host Name Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the VMG.
MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the
VMG in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format,
that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
203
C HAPTER 19
Parental Control
19.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time
periods and days during which the VMG performs parental control on a specific user.
19.2 The Parental Control Screen

Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules.
Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen.
Figure 116 Security > Parental Control
Table 89 Security > Parental Control

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Parental Select Enable to activate parental control.
Control
Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new Parental Control Profile (PCP).
# This shows the index number of the rule.
Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not.
A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
PCP Name This shows the name of the rule.
Home Network This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this rule applies.
User (MAC)
Internet Access This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled.
Schedule
Network This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown.
Service
Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown.
204
Chapter 19 Parental Control
Table 89 Security > Parental Control (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.

19.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Profile

Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to
an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL
filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites.
Figure 117 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule
205
Figure 118 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add Service
Figure 119 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit Rule > Add Keyword
Table 90 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
General
Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule.
Parental Enter a descriptive name for the rule.
Control Profile
Name
Home Network Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you
User select Custom, enter the LAN user’s MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all
LAN users.
Rule List In Home Network User, select Custom, enter the LAN user’s MAC address, then click the
+ sign to enter a computer MAC address for this PCP. Up to five are allowed. Click the - sign
to remove one.
Internet Access Schedule
Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the VMG to perform parental control.
Time Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access (Authorized
access) or denied access (No access). Click the + sign above the time bar to add a new
time bar. Up to three are allowed.
Authorized Select this to allow access for the times defined above.
access
No access Select this to deny access for the times defined above.
206
Table 90 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Network Service
Network If you select Block, the VMG prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs
Service Setting listed below.
If you select Allow, the VMG blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below.
Add new Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the
service Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule.
# This shows the index number of the rule. Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it.
Service Name This shows the name of the rule.
Protocol:Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule.
Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.

Blocked Site/ Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the VMG
URL Keyword blocks access. Click Delete to remove it.
Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the VMG.
207
C HAPTER 20
Scheduler Rule
20.1 Overview
You can define time periods and days during which the VMG performs scheduled rules of certain
features (such as Firewall Access Control) in the Scheduler Rule screen.
20.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen

Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules.
Click Security > Scheduler Rule to open the following screen.
Figure 120 Security > Scheduler Rule
Table 91 Security > Scheduler Rule

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Rule Click this to create a new rule.
Rule Name This shows the name of the rule.
Day This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled.
Time This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled.
Description This shows the description of this rule.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule.
Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule.
Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature.
20.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule

Click the Add New Rule button in the Scheduler Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a
schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access
schedule.
208
Chapter 20 Scheduler Rule
Figure 121 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit
Table 92 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Rule Name Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this
schedule.
Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the VMG to perform this scheduler rule.
Time if Day Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which the rule will be enforced.
Range
Description Enter a description for this scheduler rule.
209
C HAPTER 21
Certificates
21.1 Overview
The VMG can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based
on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key.
Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.

• The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the VMG's CA-
signed certificates (Section 21.4 on page 214).
• The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the VMG (Section 21.4 on
page 214).

Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government
certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone
can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the VMG
to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send
the certification requests to a certification authority.
21.3 The Local Certificates Screen

Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the VMG’s summary
list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 122 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
210
Chapter 21 Certificates
Table 93 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Private Key is Select the checkbox and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the VMG.
protected by a The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
password
Choose File Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Import Certificate Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification
authority from your computer to the VMG.
Create Certificate Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the VMG generate a certification
Request request.
Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you
give each certificate a unique name.
Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company)
and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject
information.
Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or
company and country.
Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in
red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become
applicable.
Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has
already expired.
Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate.
Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
21.3.1 Create Certificate Request

Click Security > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to
open the following screen. Use this screen to have the VMG generate a certification request.
211
Figure 123 Create Certificate Request
Table 94 Create Certificate Request

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
Name
Common Name Select Auto to have the VMG configure this field automatically. Or select Customize to
enter it manually.
Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field
provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The
domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
Organization Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner
Name belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the VMG drops trailing spaces.
State/Province Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is
Name located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the VMG drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located.
Name
After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate
request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the
signed certificate into the VMG. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen.
212
Figure 124 Certificate Request Created
21.3.2 Load Signed Certificate

After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local
Certificates screen click the certificate request’s Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate
into the VMG.
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
it.
Figure 125 Load Signed Certificate
213
Table 95 Load Signed Certificate

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate This is the name of the signed certificate.
Name
Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the VMG.
21.4 The Trusted CA Screen

Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a
summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the VMG to accept as
trusted. The VMG accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being
trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these
certification authorities.
Figure 126 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
Table 96 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification
Certificate authority that you trust to the VMG.
Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and
Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification
Authority signed the certificate.
Modify Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
21.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate

Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view
in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate.
214
Figure 127 Trusted CA: View
Table 97 Trusted CA: View

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Type This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification
Authority signed the certificate.
Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C).
Certificate This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM
uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you
can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management
computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
21.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate

Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The
VMG trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.
215
Figure 128 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
Table 98 Trusted CA: Import Certificate

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate File Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Choose File to
Path find it.
216
C HAPTER 22
Voice
22.1 Overview
Use this chapter to:
• Connect an analog phone to the VMG.

• Make phone calls over the Internet, as well as the regular phone network.
• Configure settings such as speed dial.
• Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls.

These screens allow you to configure your VMG to make phone calls over the Internet and your
regular phone line, and to set up the phones you connect to the VMG.
• Use the SIP Account screen (Section 22.3 on page 218) to set up information about your SIP
account, control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the VMG use and configure audio
settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the VMG.
• Use the SIP Service Provider screen (Section 22.4 on page 223) to configure the SIP server
information, QoS for VoIP calls, the numbers for certain phone functions, and dialing plan.
• Use the Phone Device screen (Section 22.5 on page 231) to view detailed information of the
phone devices.
• Use the Region screen (Section 22.6 on page 231) to change settings that depend on the
country you are in.
• Use the Call Rule screen (Section 22.7 on page 232) to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently-
used (VoIP) phone numbers.
• Use the Call History screen (Section 22.8 on page 233) to view detailed information for each
outgoing call you made or each incoming call from someone calling you.
• Use the Call Summary screen (Section 22.9 on page 233) to view the summary list of received,
dialed and missed calls.
You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account. In fact, if your service
provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen, it is usually best to leave it at
its default setting.
217
Chapter 22 Voice
22.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP
VoIP
VoIP stands for Voice over IP. IP is the Internet Protocol, which is the message-carrying standard
the Internet runs on. So, Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals (speech) over the Internet (or
another network that uses the Internet Protocol).
SIP
SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device
(like a computer or the VMG) send messages to another. In VoIP, these messages are about phone
calls over the network. For example, when you dial a number on your VMG, it sends a SIP message
over the network asking the other device (the number you dialed) to take part in the call.
SIP Accounts
A SIP account is a type of VoIP account. It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you
make phone calls over the Internet. When you set the VMG to use your SIP account to make calls,
the VMG is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the
Internet.
Strictly speaking, you don’t need a SIP account. It is possible for one SIP device (like the VMG) to
call another without involving a SIP service provider. However, the networking difficulties involved
in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances. Your SIP account
provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup - figuring out how to
get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another.
How to Find Out More

See Chapter 4 on page 33 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example
scenario.
See Section 22.10 on page 234 for advanced technical information on SIP.
22.2 Before You Begin

• Before you can use these screens, you need to have a VoIP account already set up. If you don’t
have one yet, you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet.
• You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready, before you start to
configure the VMG.
22.3 The SIP Account Screen

The VMG uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming call’s destination
number matches your SIP account’s SIP number. In order to make or receive a VoIP call, you need
218
Chapter 22 Voice
to enable and configure a SIP account, and map it to a phone port. The SIP account contains
information that allows your VMG to connect to your VoIP service provider.
See Section 22.3.1 on page 219 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port.
Use this screen to view SIP account information. You can also enable and disable each SIP account.
To access this screen, click VoIP > SIP > SIP Account.
Figure 129 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account
Table 99 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new account Click this to configure a SIP account.
Active This shows whether the SIP account is activated or not.
A yellow bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated. A gray bulb signifies that this SIP
account is not activated.
SIP Account This shows the name of the SIP account.
Service Provider This shows the name of the SIP service provider.
Account Number. This shows the SIP number.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account.
Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP account from the VMG.
22.3.1 The SIP Account Add/Edit Screen

Use this screen to configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port. To access this screen, click
the Add new account button or click the Edit icon of an entry in the VoIP > SIP > SIP Account
screen.
Note: Click more to see all the fields in the screen. You don’t necessarily need to use all
these fields to set up your account. Click less to see and configure only the fields
needed for this feature.
219
Chapter 22 Voice
Figure 130 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add new accoun/Edit
Table 100 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add new accoun/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SIP Account This field displays ADD_NEW if you are creating a new SIP account or the SIP
Selection account you are modifying.
SIP Service Select the SIP service provider profile to use for the SIP account you are
Provider configuring in this screen. This field is read-only when you are modifying a SIP
Association account.
General
Enable SIP Select this if you want the VMG to use this account. Clear it if you do not want
Account the VMG to use this account.
SIP Account Enter your SIP number. In the full SIP URI, this is the part before the @ symbol.
Number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters.
Authentication
Username Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to
you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters.
Password Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to
you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters.
more/less Click more to display and edit more information for the SIP account. Click less
to display and configure the basic SIP account settings.
220
Chapter 22 Voice
Table 100 VoIP > SIP > SIP Account > Add new accoun/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
URL Type Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the VMG
sends the SIP number.
SIP - include the SIP service domain name.
TEL - do not include the SIP service domain name.

Voice Features
Primary Select the type of voice coder/decoder (codec) that you want the VMG to use.
Compression Type
G.711 provides high voice quality but requires more bandwidth (64 kbps). G.711
Secondary is the default codec used by phone companies and digital handsets.
Compression Type
• G.711a is typically used in Europe.
Third • G.711u is typically used in North America and Japan.
Compression Type
G.726-24 operates at 24 kbps.
G.726-32 operates at 32 kbps.
G.722 is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec that operates at 48, 56 and 64 kbps. By
using a sample rate of 16 kHz, G.722 can provide higher fidelity and better audio
quality than narrowband codecs like G.711, in which the voice signal is sampled
at 8 KHz.
The VMG must use the same codec as the peer. When two SIP devices start a SIP
session, they must agree on a codec.
Select the VMG’s first choice for voice coder/decoder.
Select the VMG’s second choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only
want the VMG to accept the first choice.
Select the VMG’s third choice for voice coder/decoder. Select None if you only
want the VMG to accept the first or second choice.
Speaking Volume Select the loudness that the VMG uses for speech that it sends to the peer
Control device.
-12 is the quietest, and 12 is the loudest.

Listening Volume Select the loudness that the VMG uses for speech that it receives from the peer
Control device.
-12 is the quietest, and 12 is the loudest.

Enable G.168 Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice
(Echo reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk.
Cancellation)
Enable VAD Select this if the VMG should stop transmitting when you are not speaking. This
(Voice Active reduces the bandwidth the VMG uses.
Detector)
Call Features
Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls.
Clear this if you do not want to send identification.
Enable Call Select this to enable call transfer on the VMG. This allows you to transfer an
Transfer incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone.
Enable Call Select this to enable call waiting on the VMG. This allows you to place a call on
Waiting hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone number.
Call Waiting Specify a time of seconds that the VMG waits before rejecting the second call if
Reject Timer you do not answer it.
221
Chapter 22 Voice
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Select this if you want the VMG to forward all incoming calls to the specified
Unconditional phone number.
Forward
Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right.
Enable Busy Select this if you want the VMG to forward incoming calls to the specified phone
Forward number if the phone port is busy.
If you have call waiting, the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone
number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call.
Enable No Answer Select this if you want the VMG to forward incoming calls to the specified phone
Forward number if the call is unanswered. (See No Answer Time.)

No Answer Time This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature.
Enter the number of seconds the VMG should wait for you to answer an incoming
call before it considers the call is unanswered.
Enable Do Not Select this to set your phone to not ring when someone calls you.
Disturb
Enable Select this if you do not want the phone to ring when someone tries to call you
Anonymous Call with caller ID deactivated.
Block (for
incomming call)
Enable MWI Select this if you want to hear a waiting (beeping) dial tone on your phone when
(Message Waiting you have at least one voice message. Your VoIP service provider must support
Indication) this feature.
Expiration Time Keep the default value for this field, unless your VoIP service provider tells you to
change it. Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the
message waiting service each time the VMG subscribes to the service. Before
this time passes, the VMG automatically subscribes again.
Hot Line / Warm Select this to enable the hot line or warm line feature on the VMG.
Line Enable
Warm Line Select this to have the VMG dial the specified warm line number after you pick
up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad for a period of time.
Hot Line Select this to have the VMG dial the specified hot line number immediately when
you pick up the telephone.
Hot Line / Warm Enter the number of the hot line or warm line that you want the VMG to dial.
Line number
Warm Line Timer Enter a number of seconds that the VMG waits before dialing the warm line
number if you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad.
Enable Missed Select this option to have the VMG e-mail you a notification when there is a
Call Email missed call.
Notification
Mail Account Select a mail account for the e-mail address specified below. If you select None
here, e-mail notifications will not be sent via e-mail.
You must have configured a mail account already in the Email Notification
screen.
Send Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is
Notification to left blank, notifications will not be sent via e-mail.
Email
Missed Call Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that
Email Title the VMG sends.
222
Chapter 22 Voice
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Early Media Select this option if you want people to hear a customized recording when they
call you.
IVR Play Select the tone you want people to hear when they call you.
Index
This field is configurable only when you select Early Media. See Section 22.10
on page 234 for information on how to record these tones.
Music On Hold Select this option to play a customized recording when you put people on hold.
IVR Play Select the tone to play when you put someone on hold.
Index
This field is configurable only when you select Music On Hold. See Section
22.10 on page 234 for information on how to record these tones.
Enable Call When you make a phone call but hear a busy tone, Call Completion on Busy
Completion on Subscriber (CCBS) allows you to enable auto-callback by pressing 5 and hanging
Busy Subscriber up the phone. The VMG then tries to call that phone number every minute since
(CCBS) after you hang up the phone. When the called party becomes available within the
CCBS timeout period (60 minutes by default), both phones ring.
• If the called party’s phone rings because of CCBS but no one answers the
phone after 180 seconds, you will hear a busy tone. You can enable CCBS on
the called number again.
• If you manually call the number on which you have enabled CCBS before the
CCBS timeout period expires, the VMG disables CCBS on the called number.
• If you call a second number before the first called number’s CCBS timeout
period expires, the VMG stops calling the first number until you finish the
second call.
Select this option to activate CCBS on the VMG.
Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the VMG.
Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.
22.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen

Use this screen to view the SIP service provider information on the VMG. Click VoIP > SIP > SIP
Service Provider to open the following screen.
Figure 131 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider
Table 101 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add new provider
SIP Service This shows the name of the SIP service provider.
Provider Name
SIP Server This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP server.
Address
223
Chapter 22 Voice
Table 101 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
REGISTER Server This shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server.
Address
SIP Service This shows the SIP service domain name.
Domain
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP service provider.
Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP service provider from the VMG.
22.4.1 The SIP Service Provider Add/Edit Screen

Use this screen to configure a SIP service provider on the VMG. Click the Add new provider button
or an Edit icon in the VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider to open the following screen.
Note: Click more to see all the fields in the screen. You don’t necessarily need to use all
these fields to set up your account. Click less to see and configure only the fields
needed for this feature.
224
Chapter 22 Voice
Figure 132 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add new provider/Edit
Table 102 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add new provider/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SIP Service Provider Selection
Service Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in
Provider this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes.
Selection
General
SIP Service Select this to enable the SIP service provider.
Provider
SIP Service Enter the name of your SIP service provider.
Provider Name
SIP Local Port Enter the VMG’s listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one.
Otherwise, keep the default value.
225
Chapter 22 Voice
Table 102 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider > Add new provider/Edit (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
SIP Server Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service
Address provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. It does not matter whether the
SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server.
SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server’s listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one.
Otherwise, keep the default value.
REGISTER Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server, if your VoIP service provider
Server Address gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address
field. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters.
REGISTER Enter the SIP register server’s listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you
Server Port one. Otherwise, enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field.
SIP Service Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI, this is the part after the @ symbol.
Domain You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters.
RFC Support
RFC PRACK (RFC 3262) defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP provisional
3262(Require: response messages, which convey information on the processing progress of the request.
100rel) This uses the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement (PRACK)
method.
Select this to have the the peer device require the option tag 100rel to send provisional
responses reliably.
VoIP IOP Flags Select the VoIP inter-operability settings you want to activate.
Replace dial Replace a dial digit “#” with “%23” in the INVITE messages.
digit '#' to
'%23' in SIP
messages
Remove ‘:5060’ Remove “:5060” and “transport=udp” from the “Request-URI” string in the REGISTER and
and INVITE packets.
'transport=udp'
from request-
uri in the in-
dialog outgoing
SIP request
Remove the Remove the 'Route' header in SIP packets.
'Route' header
in SIP
messages
Don't send re- Do not send a re-Invite packet to the remote party when the remote party answers that it
Invite to the can support multiple codecs.
remote party
when there are
multiple codecs
answered in the
SDP
Bound Interface Name
Bound If you select LAN or Any_WAN, the VMG automatically activates the VoIP service when any
Interface Name LAN or WAN connection is up.
If you select Multi_WAN, you also need to select two or more pre-configured WAN
interfaces. The VoIP service is activated only when one of the selected WAN connections is
up.
Outbound Proxy
226
Chapter 22 Voice
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Outbound Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server if your VoIP service
Proxy Address provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls. This allows the VMG to work with
any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG. Turn off any SIP ALG
on a NAT router in front of the VMG to keep it from re-translating the IP address (since this
is already handled by the outbound proxy server).
Outbound Enter the SIP outbound proxy server’s listening port, if your VoIP service provider gave you
Proxy Port one. Otherwise, keep the default value.
Use DHCP Select this to enable the SIP server via DHCP option 120.
Option 120
First
RTP Port Range
Start Port Enter the listening port number(s) for RTP traffic, if your VoIP service provider gave you this
information. Otherwise, keep the default values.
End Port
To enter one port number, enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields.
To enter a range of ports,
• enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field.
• enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field.
SRTP Support
SRTP Support When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used to
handle voice data transfer. The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP) is a security
profile of RTP. It is designed to provide encryption and authentication for the RTP data in
both unicast and multicast applications.
The VMG supports encryption using AES with a 128-bit key. To protect data integrity, SRTP
uses a Hash-based Message Authentication Code (HMAC) calculation with Secure Hash
Algorithm (SHA)-1 to authenticate data. HMAC SHA-1 produces a 80 or 32-bit
authentication tag that is appended to the packet.
Both the caller and callee should use the same algorithms to establish an SRTP session.
Crypto Suite Select the encryption and authentication algorithm set used by the VMG to set up an SRTP
media session with the peer device.
Select AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 or AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 to enable

both data encryption and authentication for voice data.
Select AES_CM_128_NULL to use 128-bit data encryption but disable data authentication.
Select NULL_CIPHER_HMAC_SHA1_80 to disable encryption but require authentication

using the default 80-bit tag.
DTMF Mode
DTMF Mode Control how the VMG handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its
buttons. You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses.
RFC2833 - send the DTMF tones in RTP packets.
PCM - send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream. This method works best when you are
using a codec that does not use compression (like G.711). Codecs that use compression
(like G.729 and G.726) can distort the tones.
SIP INFO - send the DTMF tones in SIP messages.

Transport Type
Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol UDP or TCP (usually UDP) used for SIP.
Ignore Direct IP Select Enable to have the connected CPE devices accept SIP requests only from the SIP
proxy/register server specified above. SIP requests sent from other IP addresses will be
ignored.
227
Chapter 22 Voice
LABEL DESCRIPTION
FAX Option This field controls how the VMG handles fax messages.
G711 Fax Select this if the VMG should use G.711 to send fax messages. You have to also select which
Passthrough operating codec (G.711Mulaw or G.711Alaw) to use for encoding/decoding FAX data. The
peer devices must use the same settings.
T38 Fax Relay Select this if the VMG should send fax messages as UDP or TCP/IP packets through IP
networks. This provides better quality, but it may have inter-operability problems. The peer
devices must also use T.38.
QoS Tag
SIP DSCP Mark Enter the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number for SIP message transmissions. The VMG
Setting creates Class of Service (CoS) priority tags with this number to SIP traffic that it transmits.
RTP DSCP Mark Enter the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number for RTP voice transmissions. The VMG creates
Setting Class of Service (CoS) priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits.
Timer Setting
Expiration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register server
Duration before it is deleted. The VMG automatically tries to re-register your SIP account when one-
half of this time has passed. (The SIP register server might have a different expiration.)
Register Re- Enter the number of seconds the VMG waits before it tries again to register the SIP account,
send timer if the first try failed or if there is no response.
Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the VMG lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before
it automatically disconnects the session.
Min-SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the VMG lets a SIP session remain idle (without
traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. When two SIP devices start a SIP
session, they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions. This field is the shortest
expiration time that the VMG accepts.
Phone Key Enter the key combinations for certain functions of the SIP phone.
Config
Call Return Enter the key combinations that you can enter to place a call to the last number that called
you.
Caller ID Enter the key combinations that you can enter to activate caller ID for the next call.
Display Call
Caller ID Enter the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate caller ID for the next call.
Hidden Call
One Shot Caller Enter the key combinations that you can enter to activate caller ID for the next call only.
ID Display Call
One Shot Caller Enter the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate caller ID for the next call only.
ID Hidden Call
Call Waiting Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn on the call waiting function.
Enable
Call Waiting Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn off the call waiting function.
Disable
IVR Enter the key combinations that you can enter to record custom caller ringing tones (the
sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone) and on hold tones (the sound someone
hears when you put their call on hold). IVR stands for Interactive Voice Response.
Internal Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to call the phone(s) connected to the VMG.
Call Transfer Enter the key combinations that you can enter to transfer a call to another phone.
Unconditional Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward all incoming calls to the phone
Call Forward number you specified in the SIP > SIP Account screen.
Enable
228
Chapter 22 Voice
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Unconditional Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the unconditional call forward
Call Forward function off.
Disable
No Answer Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming calls to the phone
Forward Enable number you specified in the SIP > SIP Account screen if the calls are unanswered.
No Answer Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the no answer call forward function
Forward off.
Disable
Call Forward Enter the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming calls to the phone
When Busy number you specified in the SIP > SIP Account screen if the phone port is busy.
Enable
Call Forward Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn the busy forward function off.
When Busy
Disable
One Shot Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to activate call waiting on the next calls.
Waiting Enable
One Shot Call Enter the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate call waiting on the next call
Waiting Disable only.
Do Not Disturb Enter the key combinations that you can enter to set your phone not to ring when someone
Enable calls you.
Do Not Disturb Enter the key combinations that you can enter to turn this function off.
Disable
Call Completion Enter the key combinations that you can enter to disable CCBS on a call.
on Busy
Subscriber
(CCBS)
Deactivate
Outgoing SIP Enter the key combinations that you can enter to select the SIP account that you use to
make outgoing calls.
If you enter #12(by default)<SIP account index number>#<the phone number you want to
call>, #1201#12345678 for example, the VMG uses the first SIP account to call 12345678.
Last Call Redial Enter the key combinations that you can enter to make the last call again.
Single Internal Enter the key combinations that you can enter to specify the prefix of a phone port on the
Call VMG that you use to make internal calls.
Dial Plan
Enable Dial Select this to activate the dial plan rules you specify in the text box provided. See Section
Plan 22.4.2 on page 230 for how to set up a rule.
Dialing Interval Selection
Dialing Interval Enter the number of seconds the VMG should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it
Selection makes the phone call. The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers.
DNS SRV
229
Chapter 22 Voice
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable DNS Select this to have the VMG use DNS procedures to resolve the SIP domain and find the SIP
SRV server’s IP address, port number and supported transport protocol(s).
The VMG first uses DNS Name Authority Pointer (NAPTR) records to determine the transport
protocols supported by the SIP server. It then performs DNS Service (SRV) query to
determine the port number for the protocol. The VMG resolves the SIP server’s IP address
by a standard DNS address record lookup.
The SIP Server Port and REGISTER Server Port fields in the General section above are
grayed out and not applicable and the Transport Type can also be set to AUTO if you
enable this option.
22.4.2 Dial Plan Rules

A dial plan defines the dialing patterns, such as the length and range of the digits for a telephone
number. It also includes country codes, access codes, area codes, local numbers, long distance
numbers or international call prefixes. For example, the dial plan ([2-9]xxxxxx) does not allow a
local number which begins with 1 or 0.
Without a dial plan, users have to manually enter the whole callee’s number and wait for the
specified dialing interval to time out or press a terminator key (usually the pound key on the phone
keypad) before the VMG makes the call.
The VMG initializes a call when the dialed number matches any one of the rules in the dial plan. Dial
plan rules follow these conventions:
• The collection of rules is in parentheses ().

• Rules are separated by the | (bar) symbol.
• “x” stands for a wildcard and can be any digit from 0 to 9.
• A subset of keys is in a square bracket []. Ranges are allowed.
For example, [359] means a number matching this rule can be 3, 5 or 9. [26-8*] means a
number matching this rule can be 2, 6, 7, 8 or *.
• The dot “.” appended to a digit allows the digit to be ignored or repeated multiple times. Any digit
(0~9, *, #) after the dot will be ignored.
For example, (01.) means a number matching this rule can be 0, 01, 0111, 01111, and so on.
• <dialed-number:translated-number> indicates the number after the colon replaces the number
before the colon in an angle bracket <>. For example,
(<:1212> xxxxxxx) means the VMG automatically prefixes the translated-number “1212” to the
number you dialed before making the call. This can be used for local calls in the US.
(<9:> xxx xxxxxxx) means the VMG automatically removes the specified prefix “9” from the
number you dialed before making the call. This is always used for making outside calls from an
office.
(xx<123:456>xxxx) means the VMG automatically translates “123” to “456” in the number you
dialed before making the call.
• Calls with a number followed by the exclamation mark “!” will be dropped.
• Calls with a number followed by the termination character “@” will be made immediately. Any
digit (0~9, *, #) after the @ character will be ignored.
230
Chapter 22 Voice
In this example dial plan (0 | [49]11 | 1 [2-9]xx xxxxxxx | 1 947 xxxxxxx !), you can dial “0” to call
the local operator, call 411 or 911, or make a long distance call with an area code starting from 2 to
9 in the US. The calls with the area code 947 will be dropped.
22.5 The Phone Device Screen

Use this screen to view detailed information of the phone devices. To access this screen, click VoIP
> Phone > Phone Device.
Figure 133 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device
Table 103 VoIP > Phone > Phone Device

LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This displays the index number of the phone device.
Phone ID This field displays the name of a phone port on the VMG.
Internal Number This field displays the internal call prefix of a phone port on the VMG.
Incoming SIP This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive calls on this phone port.
Number
Outgoing SIP This field displays the SIP number that you use to make calls on this phone port.
Number
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account.
22.6 The Region Screen

Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the VMG is in. To
access this screen, click VoIP > Region.
Figure 134 VoIP > Region
231
Chapter 22 Voice
Table 104 VoIP > Region

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Region Settings Select the place in which the VMG is located.
Call Service Mode Select the mode for supplementary phone services (call hold, call waiting, call transfer
and three-way conference calls) that your VoIP service provider supports.
Europe Type - use supplementary phone services in European mode
USA Type - use supplementary phone services American mode
You might have to subscribe to these services to use them. Contact your VoIP service
provider.
22.7 The Call Rule Screen

Use this screen to add, edit, or remove speed-dial numbers for outgoing calls. Speed dial provides
shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers. You also have to create speed-dial
entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters. Once you have configured a speed dial
rule, you can use a shortcut (the speed dial number, #01 for example) on your phone's keypad to
call the phone number.
Figure 135 VoIP > Call Rule
Table 105 VoIP > Call Rule

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Clear All Speed Click this to erase all the speed-dial entries on this screen.
Dials
Keys This field displays the speed-dial number you should dial to use this entry.
Number Enter the SIP number you want the VMG to call when you dial the speed-dial number.
Description Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. You can
use up to 127 printable ASCII characters.
232
Chapter 22 Voice
Table 105 VoIP > Call Rule

LABEL DESCRIPTION
22.8 The Call History Screen

This screen allows you to view a call history list. You also can see detailed information for each
outgoing call you made or each incoming call from someone calling you.
Click VoIP > Call History > Call History. The following screen displays.
Figure 136 VoIP > Call History > Call History
Table 106 VoIP > Call History > Call History

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Classify Select the type of the calls. The call types are: Incoming, Outgoing and Missed.
Clear List Click this button to remove all entries from the call history list.
Refresh Click this button to renew the call history list.
Type This displays the type of the calls.
Date This displays the date when the calls were made.
Name This displays the SIP account you called.
Number This displays the SIP number you called.
Phone Device This field displays the name of a phone port on the VMG.
Outgoing Number This displays how many calls originated from you that day.
Duration This displays how long the current call has lasted.
(hh:mm:ss)
Modify Click the Delete icon to remove the call history.
Export Click Export to download a call history list.
22.9 The Call Summary Screen

The VMG logs calls from or to your SIP numbers. This screen allows you to view the summary of
received, dialed and missed calls.
Click VoIP > Call History > Call Summary. The following screen displays.
233
Chapter 22 Voice
Figure 137 VoIP > Call History > Call Summary
Table 107 VoIP > Call History > Call Summary

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Click this button to renew the call history list.
Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the call history list.
Date This is the date when the calls were made.

Total Calls This displays the total number of calls from or to your SIP numbers that day.
Outgoing Calls This displays how many calls originated from you that day.
Incoming Calls This displays how many calls you received that day.
Missing Calls This displays how many incoming calls were not answered that day.
Total Duration This displays how long all calls lasted that day.
(hh:mm:ss)

This section contains background material relevant to the VoIP screens.
VoIP
VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol. This allows you to make phone calls and
send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit-switched
telephone network. You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services
and voice mail. Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) companies provide VoIP service.
Circuit-switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second (Kbps) in each direction to
handle a telephone call. VoIP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce
the required bandwidth.
SIP
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles
the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet.
SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions. The media that is exchanged
during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling. SIP handles telephone calls
and can interface with traditional circuit-switched telephone networks.
SIP Identities
A SIP account uses an identity (sometimes referred to as a SIP address). A complete SIP identity is
called a SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier). A SIP account's URI identifies the SIP account in a
234
Chapter 22 Voice
way similar to the way an e-mail address identifies an e-mail account. The format of a SIP identity
is SIP-Number@SIP-Service-Domain.
SIP Number
The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the “@” symbol. A SIP number can
use letters like in an e-mail address (johndoe@your-ITSP.com for example) or numbers like a
telephone number (1122334455@VoIP-provider.com for example).
SIP Service Domain

The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI. For example,
if the SIP address is 1122334455@VoIP-provider.com, then “VoIP-provider.com” is the SIP service
domain.
SIP Registration
Each VMG is an individual SIP User Agent (UA). To provide voice service, it has a public IP address
for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers.
A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the
users it represents, as well as its current IP address (for the routing of incoming SIP requests).
After successful registration, the SIP server knows that the users (identified by their dedicated SIP
URIs) are represented by the UA, and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and
responses should be sent.
Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client (UAC) running in the VoIP gateway (the VMG). The
gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER
message, as well as the relevant user and authorization data.
A SIP registration has a limited lifespan. The User Agent Client must renew its registration within
this lifespan. If it does not do so, the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar's
database and the connection broken.
The VMG attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on. When you enable
a subscriber port that was previously disabled, the VMG attempts to register the port immediately.
Authorization Requirements
SIP registrations (and subsequent SIP requests) require a username and password for
authorization. These credentials are validated via a challenge / response system using the HTTP
digest mechanism (as detailed in RFC 3261, "SIP: Session Initiation Protocol").
SIP Servers
SIP is a client-server protocol. A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP
requests. A SIP server responds to the SIP requests.
When you use SIP to make a VoIP call, it originates at a client and terminates at a server. A SIP
client could be a computer or a SIP phone. One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server.
235
Chapter 22 Voice
SIP User Agent

A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls. This means that SIP can be used for
peer-to-peer communications even though it is a client-server protocol. In the following figure,
either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call. A and B can also both act as a SIP
user agent to receive the call.
Figure 138 SIP User Agent
SIP Proxy Server

A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server.
In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device
C.
1 The client device (A in the figure) sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server (B).
2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C.

Figure 139 SIP Proxy Server
SIP Redirect Server

A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests, translates the destination address to an IP address and
sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request. Then the client device that
originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the
redirect server. Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests.
236
Chapter 22 Voice
In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device
C.
1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server (B).
2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C’s IP address (or domain name).
3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C.

Figure 140 SIP Redirect Server
SIP Register Server

A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity-to-IP address (or domain name)
mapping. The register server checks your user name and password when you register.
RTP
When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the RTP (Real time Transport Protocol) is used to handle voice
data transfer. See RFC 1889 for details on RTP.
Pulse Code Modulation

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and
converts them into bits.
237
Chapter 22 Voice
SIP Call Progression

The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call. A calls B.
Table 108 SIP Call Progression

A B
1. INVITE
2. Ringing
3. OK
4. ACK
5.Dialogue (voice traffic)

6. BYE
7. OK
1 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B. This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP
telephone call.
2 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing.
3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered.
4 A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call.
5 Now A and B exchange voice media (talk).
6 After talking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request.
7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated.
SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers

Usually, the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server. Then, the
proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded (according to the URI
requested by the SIP UAC). The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before
arriving at its destination.
The response to the request goes to all the proxy servers through which the request passed, in
reverse sequence. Once the session is set up, session traffic is sent between the UAs directly,
bypassing all the proxy servers in between.
The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents (UA 1 and UA
2) and the proxy servers (this example shows two proxy servers, PROXY 1 and PROXY 2).
238
Chapter 22 Voice
Figure 141 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers
PROXY 1 PROXY 2
SIP
SIP SIP
SIP & RTP
UA 1 UA 2
The following table shows the SIP call progression.
Table 109 SIP Call Progression

UA 1 PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA 2
Invite
Invite
100 Trying Invite
100 Trying
180 Ringing
180 Ringing
180 Ringing
200 OK
200 OK
200 OK
ACK
RTP RTP
BYE
200 OK
1 User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1. This message is an invitation to User
Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call. Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying
to complete the request.
2 Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2. Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is
trying to complete the request.
3 Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2.
4 User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing. The response
is relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1.
5 User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered. This is also relayed
back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1.
239
Chapter 22 Voice
6 User Agent 1 and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly, without
involving the proxies.
7 When User Agent 2 hangs up, he sends a BYE request.
8 User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request, and the call is
terminated.
Voice Coding
A codec (coder/decoder) codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital
signals back into analog voice signals. The VMG supports the following codecs.
• G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) waveform codec. PCM measures analog signal
amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples. G.711 provides very
good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth.
• G.726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM (ADPCM) waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than
standard PCM conversion. ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the
difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples. The more
similar the audio sample is to the prediction, the less space needed to describe it. G.726 operates
at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps.
• G.729 is an Analysis-by-Synthesis (AbS) hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on
information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds. G.729 provides good sound
quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps.
Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression

Voice Activity Detection (VAD) detects whether or not speech is present. This lets the VMG reduce
the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting “silent packets” when you are not speaking.
Comfort Noise Generation

When using VAD, the VMG generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking. The
comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken
for a lost connection.
Echo Cancellation
G.168 is an ITU-T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice
reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk.
MWI (Message Waiting Indication)

Enable Message Waiting Indication (MWI) enables your phone to give you a message–waiting
(beeping) dial tone when you have a voice message(s). Your VoIP service provider must have a
messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842.
240
Chapter 22 Voice
Custom Tones (IVR)

IVR (Interactive Voice Response) is a feature that allows you to use your telephone to interact with
the VMG. The VMG allows you to record custom tones for the Early Media and Music On Hold
functions. The same recordings apply to both the caller ringing and on hold tones.
Table 110 Custom Tones Details

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Total Time for All Tones 900 seconds for all custom tones combined
Maximum Time per 180 seconds
Individual Tone
Total Number of Tones 5
Recordable
You can record up to 5 different custom tones but the total time must be 900
seconds or less.
Recording Custom Tones

Use the following steps if you would like to create new tones or change your tones:
1 Pick up the phone and press “****” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the message that says
you are in the configuration menu.
2 Press a number from 1101~1105 on your phone followed by the “#” key.
3 Play your desired music or voice recording into the receiver’s mouthpiece. Press the “#” key.
4 You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are
done.
Listening to Custom Tones

Do the following to listen to a custom tone:
2 Press a number from 1201~1208 followed by the “#” key to listen to the tone.
3 You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are
done.
Deleting Custom Tones

Do the following to delete a custom tone:
2 Press a number from 1301~1308 followed by the “#” key to delete the tone of your choice. Press
14 followed by the “#” key if you wish to clear all your custom tones.
241
Chapter 22 Voice
You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are
done.
22.10.1 Quality of Service (QoS)

Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real-time multimedia applications.
Type of Service (ToS)

Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS (Type of Service) values at the data source (for
example, at the VMG) so a server can decide the best method of delivery, that is the least cost,
fastest route and so on.
DiffServ
DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop
treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types
and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) indicating the level of service
desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets
differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state
information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or
give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.3
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior

DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field
in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define
up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
Figure 142 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP Unused
(6-bit) (2-bit)
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet
gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different priorities of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP
values and the configured policies.
22.10.2 Phone Services Overview

Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from
your VoIP service provider. The VMG supports the following services:
3. The VMG does not support DiffServ at the time of writing.
242
Chapter 22 Voice
• Call Return
• Call Hold
• Call Waiting
• Making a Second Call
• Call Transfer
• Call Forwarding
• Three-Way Conference
• Internal Calls
• Call Park and Pickup
• Do not Disturb
• IVR
• Call Completion
• CCBS
• Outgoing SIP
Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the
VMG's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP
service provider.
22.10.2.1 The Flash Key

Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before
releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash" key (button) that generates the signal
electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the
hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing
is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as
hanging up by the VMG.
You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key.
22.10.2.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services

This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call
Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below.
After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command
timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-command, the current operation will be
aborted.
Table 111 European Flash Key Commands

COMMAND SUB-COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call.
Switch back to the call (if there is no second call).

Flash 0 Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting
for answer.
Flash 1 Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or
resume with caller presently on hold.
243
Chapter 22 Voice
Table 111 European Flash Key Commands

Flash 2 1. Switch back and forth between two calls.
2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call.
3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls
(one is on-line, the other is on hold).
Flash 3 Create three-way conference connection.
Flash *98# Transfer the call to another phone.
European Call Hold

Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key.
If you have another call, press the flash key and then “2” to switch back and forth between caller A
and B by putting either one on hold.
Press the flash key and then “0” to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call
on line.
Press the flash key and then “1” to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold.
If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring.
European Call Waiting

This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same
telephone (directory) number.
If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone. Take one of the
following actions.
• Reject the second call.

Press the flash key and then press “0”.
• Disconnect the first call and answer the second call.
Either press the flash key and press “1”, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone
after it rings.
• Put the first call on hold and answer the second call.
Press the flash key and then “2”.
European Call Transfer

Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone.
1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.
2 When you hear the dial tone, dial “*98#” followed by the number to which you want to transfer the
call.
3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.
244
Chapter 22 Voice
European Three-Way Conference

Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls.
1 When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the caller on hold and
get a dial tone.
2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call.
3 When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press “3” to create a three-way
conversation.
4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection.
5 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is
on-line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press “2”.
22.10.2.3 USA Type Supplementary Services

This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service
Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below.
After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command
timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid sub-command, the current operation will be
aborted.
Table 112 USA Flash Key Commands

Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call. After the second call is
successful, press the flash key again to have a three-way conference call.
Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call.

Flash *98# Transfer the call to another phone.
USA Call Hold

Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key.
If you have another call, press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by
putting either one on hold.
If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring.
USA Call Waiting

This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same
telephone (directory) number.
If there is a second call to your telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone.
Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call.
245
Chapter 22 Voice
USA Call Transfer

Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone.
1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.
2 When you hear the dial tone, dial “*98#” followed by the number to which you want to transfer the
call.
3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.
USA Three-Way Conference

Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls.
1 When you are on the phone talking to someone (party A), press the flash key to put the caller on
hold and get a dial tone.
2 Dial a phone number directly to make another call (to party B).
3 When party B answers the second call, press the flash key to create a three-way conversation.
4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection.
5 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (with
party A on-line and party B on hold), press the flash key.
6 If you want to go back to the three-way conversation, press the flash key again.
7 If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections again,
press the flash key. This time the party B is on-line and party A is on hold.
22.10.2.4 Phone Functions Summary

The following table shows the key combinations you can enter on your phone’s keypad to use
certain features.
Table 113 Phone Functions Summary

ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
*98# Call transfer Transfer a call to another phone. See Section 22.10.2.2 on page 243
(Europe type) and Section 22.10.2.3 on page 245 (USA type).
*66# Call return Place a call to the last person who called you.
*95# Enable Do Not Disturb Use these to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you, or
to turn this function off.
#95# Disable Do Not Disturb
*41# Enable Call Waiting Use these to allow you to put a call on hold when you are answering
another, or to turn this function off.
#41# Disable Call Waiting
**** IVR Use these to set up Interactive Voice Response (IVR). IVR allows
you to record custom caller ringing tones (the sound a caller hears
before you pick up the phone) and on hold tones (the sound
someone hears when you put their call on hold).
#### Internal Call Call the phone(s) connected to the VMG.
246
Chapter 22 Voice
Table 113 Phone Functions Summary

ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
*82 One Shot Caller Display Call Activate or deactivate caller ID for the next call only.
*67 One Shot Caller Hidden Call
247
C HAPTER 23
Log
23.1 Overview
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the
VMG log and then display the logs or have the VMG send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to
a syslog server.

• Use the System Log screen to see the system logs (Section 23.2 on page 249).
• Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select

Alerts and Logs

An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System
Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log
screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 114 Syslog Severity Levels

CODE SEVERITY
0 Emergency: The system is unusable.
1 Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
2 Critical: The system condition is critical.
3 Error: There is an error condition on the system.
4 Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
248
Chapter 23 Log
Table 114 Syslog Severity Levels

CODE SEVERITY
5 Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
6 Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
7 Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
23.2 The System Log Screen

Use the System Log screen to see the system logs. Click System Monitor > Log to open the
System Log screen.
Figure 143 System Monitor > Log > System Log
Table 115 System Monitor > Log > System Log

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Level Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the VMG searches through
all logs of that severity or higher.
Category Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >
Logs Setting screen.
System Log
# This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level This field displays the severity level of the log that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Category This field displays the type of the log.
Messages This field states the reason for the log.
23.3 The Security Log Screen

Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select.
Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen.
249
Chapter 23 Log
Figure 144 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
Table 116 System Monitor > Log > Security Log

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Level Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the VMG searches through
all logs of that severity or higher.
Category Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the Maintenance >
Logs Setting screen.
# This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level This field displays the severity level of the log that the device is to send to this syslog server.
Category This field displays the type of the log.
Messages This field states the reason for the log.
250
C HAPTER 24
Traffic Status
24.1 Overview
Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN, LAN
interfaces and NAT.

• Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 24.2 on page 251).
• Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 24.3 on page 252).
• Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the VMG’s client(s) (Section 24.4 on page 253)
24.2 The WAN Status Screen

Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows
the number of bytes received and sent on the VMG.
Figure 145 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
Table 117 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Connected This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.
Interface
Packets Sent
Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
251
Chapter 24 Traffic Status
Table 117 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Packets Received
Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
more...hide Click more... to show more information. Click hide more to hide them.
more
Disabled This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected.
Interface
Packets Sent
Packets Received
24.3 The LAN Status Screen

Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this
screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the VMG.
Figure 146 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
Table 118 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interfaces.
252
Chapter 24 Traffic Status
Table 118 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Sent (Packets)
Received (Packets)
24.4 The NAT Status Screen

Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. The figure in this
screen shows the NAT session statistics for hosts currently connected on the VMG.
Figure 147 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT
Table 119 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Device Name This displays the name of the connected host.
IP Address This displays the IP address of the connected host.
MAC Address This displays the MAC address of the connected host.
No. of Open This displays the number of NAT sessions currently opened for the connected host.
Session
Total This displays what percentage of NAT sessions the VMG can support is currently being used
by all connected hosts. You can also see the number of active NAT sessions and the
maximum number of NAT sessions the VMG can support.
253
C HAPTER 25
VoIP Status
25.1 The VoIP Status Screen

Click System Monitor > VoIP Status to open the following screen. You can view the VoIP
registration, current call status and phone numbers in this screen.
Figure 148 System Monitor > VoIP Status
Table 120 System Monitor > VoIP Status

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Poll Interval(s) Enter the number of seconds the VMG needs to wait before updating this screen and then
click Set Interval. Click Stop to have the VMG stop updating this screen.
SIP Status
Registration This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You can change this in
the Status screen.
Registered - The SIP account is registered with a SIP server.
Not Registered - The last time the VMG tried to register the SIP account with the SIP
server, the attempt failed. The VMG automatically tries to register the SIP account when
you turn on the VMG or when you activate it.
Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP > SIP > SIP
Account.
Registration This field displays the last time the VMG successfully registered the SIP account. The field is
Time blank if the VMG has never successfully registered this account.
URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can
change these in the VoIP > SIP screens.
Message This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account.
Waiting
254
Chapter 25 VoIP Status
Table 120 System Monitor > VoIP Status (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Last Incoming This field displays the last number that called the SIP account. The field is blank if no
Number number has ever dialed the SIP account.
Last Outgoing This field displays the last number the SIP account called. The field is blank if the SIP
Number account has never dialed a number.
Call Status
Duration This field displays how long the current call has lasted.
Status This field displays the current state of the phone call.
Idle - There are no current VoIP calls, incoming calls or outgoing calls being made.
Dial - The callee’s phone is ringing.
Ring - The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call.
Process - There is a VoIP call in progress.
DISC - The callee’s line is busy, the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook.
Codec This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone
port.
Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call
through a phone port.
Phone Status
Phone This field displays the name of a phone port on the VMG.
Outgoing This field displays the SIP number that you use to make calls on this phone port.
Number
Incoming This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive calls on this phone port.
Number
255
C HAPTER 26
ARP Table
26.1 Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
26.1.1 How ARP Works

When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device,
the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target
MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either
the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast
address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer
directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then
sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
26.2 ARP Table Screen

Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System
Monitor > ARP Table.
Figure 149 System Monitor > ARP Table
256
Chapter 26 ARP Table
Table 121 System Monitor > ARP Table

LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the ARP table entry number.
IPv4/IPv6 This is the learned IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of a device connected to a port.
Address
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.
Device This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its
configuration screen.
257
C HAPTER 27
Routing Table
27.1 Overview
Routing is based on the destination address only and the VMG takes the shortest path to forward a
packet.
27.2 The Routing Table Screen

Click System Monitor > Routing Table to open the following screen.
Figure 150 System Monitor > Routing Table
Table 122 System Monitor > Routing Table

LABEL DESCRIPTION
IPv4/IPv6 Routing Table
Destination This indicates the destination IPv4 address or IPv6 address and prefix of this route.
Gateway This indicates the IPv4 address or IPv6 address of the gateway that helps forward this
route’s traffic.
Subnet Mask This indicates the destination subnet mask of the IPv4 route.
258
Chapter 27 Routing Table
Table 122 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Flag This indicates the route status.
U-Up: The route is up.
!-Reject: The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail.
G-Gateway: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic.
H-Host: The target of the route is a host.
R-Reinstate: The route is reinstated for dynamic routing.
D-Dynamic (redirect): The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect.
M-Modified (redirect): The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect.

Metric The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for
transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower
the "cost".
Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route.
Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded.
brx indicates a LAN interface where x can be 0~3 to represent LAN1 to LAN4 respectively.
ptm0 indicates a WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.
ppp0 indicates a WAN interface using PPPoE.
259
C HAPTER 28
Multicast Status
28.1 Overview
Use the Multicast Status screens to look at IGMP/MLD group status and traffic statistics.
28.2 The IGMP Status Screen

Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the VMG has joined and which ports
have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status.
Figure 151 System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status
Table 123 System Monitor > Multicast Status > IGMP Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Click this button to update the information on this screen.
Interface This field displays the name of an interface on the VMG that belongs to an IGMP multicast
group.
Multicast Group This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs.
Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast
group’s traffic.
EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the
multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.
Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast
group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
Member This is the list of the members of the multicast group.
28.3 The MLD Status Screen

Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the VMG has joined and which ports
have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status.
260
Chapter 28 Multicast Status
Figure 152 System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status
Table 124 System Monitor > Multicast Status > MLD Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Click this button to update the status on this screen.
Interface This field displays the name of an interface on the VMG that belongs to an MLD multicast
group.
Multicast Group This field displays the name of the MLD multicast group to which the interface belongs.
Filter Mode INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast
group’s traffic.
EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the
multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.
Source List This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast
group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
Member This is the list of members in the multicast group.
261
C HAPTER 29
xDSL Statistics
29.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen

Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open
the following screen.
Figure 153 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics
Table 125 Status > xDSL Statistics

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select the time interval for refreshing statistics.
Line Select which DSL line’s statistics you want to display.
xDSL Training This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection.
Status
Mode This displays the ITU standard used for this connection.
262
Chapter 29 xDSL Statistics
Table 125 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Traffic Type This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive displays if
the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic.
Link Uptime This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was
started.
xDSL Port Details
Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Line Rate These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data.
Actual Net Data These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without
Rate transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
Trellis Coding This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and
receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce
throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
SNR Margin This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT sub-
carrier’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power.
The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could
increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets.
Actual Delay This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that
determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then
transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon)
is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the
data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed.
Transmit Power This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm).
Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider.
Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port.
Receive Power Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream
is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider.
Actual INP Sudden spikes in the line’s level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and
result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as
voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of
errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete Multi-
Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and
downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it
causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia
data.
Total Attenuation This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This
attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power
received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge,
quality, condition and length of the physical line).
Attainable Net These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and
Data Rate receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
xDSL Counters
Downstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Upstream These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
FEC This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks.
CRC This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks.
263
Chapter 29 xDSL Statistics
Table 125 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
ES This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least
one errored block or at least one defect.
SES This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing
30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES.
UAS This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds.
LOS This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds.
LOF This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds.
LOM This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds.
264
C HAPTER 30
3G Statistics
30.1 Overview
Use the 3G Statistics screens to look at 3G Internet connection status.
30.2 The 3G Statistics Screen

To open this screen, click System Monitor > 3G Statistics. The 3G status is available on this
screen only when you insert a compatible 3G dongle in a USB port on the VMG.
Figure 154 System Monitor > 3G Statistics
Table 126 System Monitor > 3G Statistics

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Select how often you want the VMG to update this screen. Select No Refresh to stop
Interval refreshing.
3G Status This field displays the status of the 3G Internet connection. This field can display:
GSM - Global System for Mobile Communications, 2G
GPRS - General Packet Radio Service, 2.5G
EDGE - Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution, 2.75G
WCDMA - Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, 3G
HSDPA - High-Speed Downlink Packet Access, 3.5G
HSUPA - High-Speed Uplink Packet Access, 3.75G
HSPA - HSDPA+HSUPA, 3.75G

Service This field displays the name of the service provider.
Provider
265
Chapter 30 3G Statistics
Table 126 System Monitor > 3G Statistics (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Signal Strength This field displays the strength of the signal in dBm.
Connection This field displays the time the connection has been up.
Uptime
3G Card This field displays the manufacturer of the 3G card.
Manufacturer
3G Card Model This field displays the model name of the 3G card.
3G Card F/W This field displays the firmware version of the 3G card.
Version
SIM Card IMSI The International Mobile Subscriber Identity or IMSI is a unique identification number
associated with all cellular networks. This number is provisioned in the SIM card.
VID/PID This field displays the USB Vendor ID and Product ID of the 3G card.
266
C HAPTER 31
System
31.1 Overview
In the System screen, you can name your VMG (Host) and give it an associated domain name for
identification purposes.
31.2 The System Screen

Click Maintenance > System to open the following screen.
Figure 155 Maintenance > System
Table 127 Maintenance > System

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Name Type a hostname for your VMG. Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes.
Domain Name Type a Domain name for your host VMG.
Cancel Click Cancel to abandon this screen without saving.
267
C HAPTER 32
User Account
32.1 Overview
In the User Account screen, you can view the settings of the “admin” and other user accounts
that you used to log in the VMG.
32.2 The User Account Screen

Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen.
Figure 156 Maintenance > User Account
Table 128 Maintenance > User Account

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Click this button to add a new user account.
Account
# This is the index number
User Name This field displays the name of the account used to log into the VMG web configurator.
Retry Times This field displays the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this
account. 0 means there is no limit.
Idle Timeout This field displays the the length of inactive time before the VMG will automatically log the
user out of the web configurator.
Lock Period This field displays the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after
a number if consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times.
Group This field displays whether this user has Administrator or User privleges.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the entry.
Click the Delete icon to remove the entry.
32.2.1 The User Account Add/Edit Screen

Click Add New Account or the Edit icon of an existing account in the Maintenance > User
Account to open the following screen.
268
Chapter 32 User Account
Figure 157 Maintenance > User Account > Add/Edit
Table 129 Maintenance > User Account > Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION
User Name Enter a new name for the account. This field displays the name of an existing account.
Old Password Type the default password or the existing password used to access the VMG web
configurator.
New Password Type your new system password (up to 256 characters). Note that as you type a password,
the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use
the new password to access the VMG.
Verify Password Type the new password again for confirmation.
Retry Times Enter the number of times consecutive wrong passwords can be entered for this account. 0
means there is no limit.
Idle Timeout Enter the length of inactive time before the VMG will automatically log the user out of the
web configurator.
Lock Period Enter the length of time a user must wait before attempting to log in again after a number if
consecutive wrong passwords have been entered as defined in Retry Times.
Group Specify whether this user will have Administrator or User privleges.
269
C HAPTER 33
Remote Management
33.1 Overview
Remote management controls through which interface(s), which services can access the VMG.
Note: The VMG is managed using the Web Configurator.
33.2 The MGMT Services Screen

Use this screen to configure through which interface(s), which services can access the VMG. You
can also specify the port numbers the services must use to connect to the VMG. Click Maintenance
> Remote Management > MGMT Services to open the following screen.
Figure 158 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services
Table 130 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services

LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface Select Any_WAN to have the VMG automatically activate the remote management service
used for when any WAN connection is up.
services
Select Multi_WAN and then select one or more WAN connections to have the VMG activate
the remote management service when the selected WAN connections are up.
service This is the service you may use to access the VMG.
LAN/WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the VMG from the LAN/WLAN.
WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the VMG from all WAN connections.
Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
270
Chapter 33 Remote Management
Table 130 Maintenance > Remote Management > MGMT Services (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
33.3 The Trust Domain Screen

Use this screen to view a list of public IP addresses which are allowed to access the VMG through
the services configured in the Maintenance > Remote Management screen. Click Maintenance
> Remote Management > Turst Domain to open the following screen.
Note: If this list is empty, all public IP addresses can access the VMG from the WAN
through the specified services.
Figure 159 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain
Table 131 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add Trust Click this to add a trusted host IP address.
Domain
IP Address This field shows a trusted host IP address.
Delete Click the Delete icon to remove the trust IP address.
33.4 The Add Trust Domain Screen

Use this screen to configure a public IP address which is allowed to access the VMG. Click the Add
Trust Domain button in the Maintenance > Remote Management > Turst Domain screen to
open the following screen.
Figure 160 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain > Add Trust Domain
271
Chapter 33 Remote Management
Table 132 Maintenance > Remote Management > Trust Domain > Add Trust Domain
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Address Enter a public IPv4 IP address which is allowed to access the service on the VMG from the
WAN.
OK Click OK to save your changes back to the VMG.
272
C HAPTER 34
SNMP
34.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the SNMP settings on the VMG.
34.2 The SNMP Screen

Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information
between network devices. Your VMG supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager
station to manage and monitor the VMG through the network. The VMG supports SNMP version one
(SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation.
Figure 161 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the VMG). An agent
translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with
SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network
management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of
packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
273
Chapter 34 SNMP
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The
manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an
agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it
initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
Click Maintenance > SNMP to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the VMG
SNMP settings.
Figure 162 Maintenance > SNMP
Table 133 Maintenance > SNMP

LABEL DESCRIPTION
SNMP Agent Select Enable to let the VMG act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to
manage and monitor the VMG through the network. Select Disable to turn this feature
off.
Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext
requests from the management station.
Set Community Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the
management station.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP
manager. The default is public and allows all requests.
System Name Enter the SNMP system name.
System Location Enter the SNMP system location.
System Contact Enter the SNMP system contact.
Trap Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.
Apply Click this to save your changes back to the VMG.
Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
274
C HAPTER 35
Time Settings
35.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password,
name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
35.2 The Time Screen

To change your VMG’s time and date, click Maintenance > Time. The screen appears as shown.
Use this screen to configure the VMG’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 163 Maintenance > Time
Table 134 Maintenance > Time

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Date/Time
Current Time This field displays the time of your VMG.
Each time you reload this page, the VMG synchronizes the time with the time server.
Current Date This field displays the date of your VMG.
Each time you reload this page, the VMG synchronizes the date with the time server.
275
Chapter 35 Time Settings
Table 134 Maintenance > Time (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Time and Date Setup
First ~ Fifth Time Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Server Address
Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII
characters in length) of your time server.
Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone
Time zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time
zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Savings Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set
their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the
evening.
State Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March
and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the
time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday
and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Rule Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So
in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November
and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the
time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday,
and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
276
C HAPTER 36
E-mail Notification
36.1 Overview
A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and
deliver e-mail messages.
To have the VMG send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server
and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver.
36.2 The Email Notification Screen

Click Maintenance > Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen. Use this screen
to view, remove and add mail server information on the VMG.
Figure 164 Maintenance > Email Notification
Table 135 Maintenance > Email Notification

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New Email Click this button to create a new entry.
Mail Server This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server.
Address
Username This field displays the user name of the sender’s mail account.
Password This field displays the password of the sender’s mail account.
Email Address This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-
mail that the VMG sends.
Delete Click this button to delete the selected entry(ies).
36.2.1 Email Notification Edit

Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen. Use this screen to configure the required
information for sending e-mail via a mail server.
277
Chapter 36 E-mail Notification
Figure 165 Email Notification > Add
Table 136 Email Notification > Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified
Address in the Account Email Address field.
If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail.
Authentication Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account
Username you specified in the Account Email Address field.
Authentication Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Password
Account Email Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail
Address notification that the VMG sends.
If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated
by the mail server as well.
OK Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh.
278
C HAPTER 37
Log Setting
37.1 Overview
You can configure where the VMG sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the VMG
records in the Logs Setting screen.
37.2 The Log Settings Screen

To change your VMG’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen appears as
shown.
Figure 166 Maintenance > Logs Setting
Table 137 Maintenance > Logs Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog Setting
Syslog Logging The VMG sends a log to an external syslog server. Select Enable to enable syslog logging.
279
Chapter 37 Log Setting
Table 137 Maintenance > Logs Setting (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Mode Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box.
If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local
File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog
server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote.
Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories
of logs.
UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server.
E-mail Log Settings
E-mail Log Select Enable to have the VMG send logs and alarm messages to the configured e-mail
Settings addresses.
Mail Account Select a mail account from which you want to send logs. You can configure mail accounts in
the Maintenance > Email Notification screen.
System Log Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that
Mail Subject the VMG sends.
Security Log Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that
Mail Subject the VMG sends.
Send Log to The VMG sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the
VMG does not send logs via E-mail.
Send Alarm to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack,
system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the
alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to
blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated.
Active Log
System Log Select the categories of system logs that you want to record.
Security Log Select the categories of security logs that you want to record.
37.2.1 Example E-mail Log

An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The
following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.
• You may edit the subject title.

• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.
• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.
• "End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent.
280
Chapter 37 Log Setting
Figure 167 E-mail Log Example

Subject:
Firewall Alert From
Date:
Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42
From:
user@zyxel.com
To:
user@zyxel.com
1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
End of Firewall Log
281
C HAPTER 38
Firmware Upgrade
38.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your VMG. You can download new firmware
releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s
performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your VMG.
38.2 The Firmware Screen

Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the
system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the VMG while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 168 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen. After you see the firmware updating screen,
wait two minutes before logging into the VMG again.
282
Chapter 38 Firmware Upgrade
Table 138 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Upgrade
Firmware
Current This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
Firmware
Version
File Path Type in the location of the file you wasnt to upload in this field or click Choose File to find
it.
Choose File Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Upgrade 3G
Package
Current 3G This is the present 3G Package version and the date created.
Package
Version
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Choose File to find it.
Choose File Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Figure 169 Firmware Uploading
The VMG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 170 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Firmware Upgrade screen.
283
Chapter 38 Firmware Upgrade
Figure 171 Error Message
284
C HAPTER 39
Backup Restore
39.1 Overview
The Backup Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also
reset your device settings back to the factory default.
39.2 The Backup Restore Screen

Click Maintenance > Backup Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 172 Maintenance > Backup Restore
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the VMG’s current configuration to a file on your
computer. Once your VMG is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you
back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file
will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the VMG’s current configuration to your computer.
285
Chapter 39 Backup Restore
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your VMG.
Table 139 Restore Configuration

LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Choose File to find it.
Choose File Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process.
Do not turn off the VMG while configuration file upload is in progress.
After the VMG configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again
to restart the VMG.
The VMG automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 173 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your
computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1).
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Configuration screen.
Figure 174 Configuration Upload Error
Reset to Factory Defaults

Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the VMG to its
factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
286
Chapter 39 Backup Restore
Figure 175 Reset Warning Message
Figure 176 Reset In Process Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your VMG.
Refer to Section 1.6 on page 21 for more information on the RESET button.
39.3 The Reboot Screen

System restart allows you to reboot the VMG remotely without turning the power off. You may need
to do this if the VMG hangs, for example.
Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the VMG reboot. This does not affect the
VMG's configuration.
Figure 177 Maintenance > Reboot
287
C HAPTER 40
Diagnostic
40.1 Overview
The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the VMG.
The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by
independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts
subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE
802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network
administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the
path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.

• The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route
packets take to a host (Section 40.3 on page 289).
• The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 40.5 on page 290).
• The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)
packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 40.5 on page 290).

How CFM Works

A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports
on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send
Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices’
CCMs within an MA.
CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults.
• Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target
after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a
connectivity fault between them.
• Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where
the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault.
Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to
the line connectivity status report.
288
Chapter 40 Diagnostic
40.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup

Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >
Ping&TraceRoute&NsLookup to open the screen shown next.
Figure 178 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping &TraceRoute&NsLookup
Table 140 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
URL or IP Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in
Address order to test a connection.
Ping Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet
takes to the specified computer.
Nslookup Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter.
40.4 802.1ag
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 8.2.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to
perform CFM actions.
289
Figure 179 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
Table 141 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag

LABEL DESCRIPTION
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
Maintenance Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.
Domain (MD)
Level
Destination Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the VMG performs a CFM loopback test.
MAC Address
802.1Q VLAN Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.
ID
VDSL Traffic This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated.
Type
Loopback This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or
Message (LBM) outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP.
Linktrace This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR).
Message (LTM)
Set MD Level Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level.
Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified
remote end point.
Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a
specified remote end point.
40.5 OAM Ping

Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to
perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The
VMG sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the VMG.
The test result then displays in the text box.
290
ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual
circuits is as follows:
• Virtual Channel (VC) Logical connections between ATM devices

• Virtual Path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels
• Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points
Figure 180 Virtual Circuit Topology
Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and
wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual
circuit.
F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC)
level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different
predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC
connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in
the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types.
• segment F4 flows (VCI=3)

• end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4)
• segment F5 flows (PTI=100)
• end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101)
OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL
devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC
segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM
link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest
neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end
PVC.
Note: The DSLAM to which the VMG is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5 to
use this test.
Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface.
291
Figure 181 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping
Table 142 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping

LABEL DESCRIPTION
Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test.
F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test.
F4 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test.
F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test.
F5 end-end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test.
292
C HAPTER 41
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs

• VMG Access and Login
• Internet Access
• Wireless Internet Access
• USB Device Connection
• UPnP
41.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The VMG does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1 Make sure the VMG is turned on.
2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the VMG.
3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the VMG and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
4 Turn the VMG off and on.
5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 19.
2 Check the hardware connections.
3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
293
Chapter 41 Troubleshooting
5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
41.2 VMG Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the VMG.
1 The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the VMG by
looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows
computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default
Gateway might be the IP address of the VMG (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address
in your Internet browser.
3 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
21.
I forgot the password.
1 See the cover page for the default login names and associated passwords.
2 If those do not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
21.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address.

• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 122), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the VMG.
2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section
1.5 on page 19.
3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
4 If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and
HTTPS (Maintenance > Remote MGMT).
294
5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the VMG with the default IP address. See
Section 1.6 on page 21.
6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account
even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser.
• Try to access the VMG using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the VMG, check
the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the VMG does not respond to
HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the VMG.
1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. See the cover page for the default login names
and associated passwords. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the VMG. Log out
of the VMG in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 41.1 on page
293.
I cannot Telnet to the VMG.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
295
41.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 19.
2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Setting >
Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in
the VMG and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same
as the settings in the VMG.
4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them.
5 If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
1 Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack
on a splitter if you have one).
2 Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband screen)
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
3 Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL
connection (Network Setting > Interface Group).
4 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL
connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
I cannot connect to the Internet using an Ethernet connection.
1 The DSL connection has priority. If the DSL connection is up, then the Ethernet connection will be
down.
296
2 Make sure you have the Ethernet WAN port connected to a MODEM or Router.
3 Make sure you converted LAN port number four as WAN. Click Enable in Network Setting >
Broadband > Ethernet WAN screen.
4 Make sure you configured a proper EthernetWAN interface (Network Setting > Broadband
screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
5 Check that the WAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet
connection (Network Setting > Interface Group).
6 If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a 3G connection.
1 The DSL and Ethernet connections have priority in that order. If the DSL or Ethernet connection is
up, then the 3G connection will be down.
2 Make sure you have connected a compatible 3G dongle to the USB port.
3 Make sure you have configured Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup correctly.
Check that the VMG is within range of a 3G base station.I cannot access the VMG anymore. I had
access to the VMG, but my connection is not available anymore.
1 Your session with the VMG may have expired. Try logging into the VMG again.
2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 19.
4 If the problem continues, contact your vendor.
41.4 Wireless Internet Access
What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this
problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.
297
• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.

• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless
devices.
To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.
• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding
wireless electronics such as cordless phones.
• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and
the wireless client.
• Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add
additional APs if necessary.
• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the
wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open
that use the Internet.
What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?
An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a
wireless network must use the same SSID.
41.5 USB Device Connection
The VMG fails to detect my USB device.
1 Disconnect the USB device.
2 Reboot the VMG.
3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is
connected to an appropriate power source that is on.
4 Re-connect your USB device to the VMG.
41.6 UPnP
When using UPnP and the VMG reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My
Network Places > Local Network.
298
1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the VMG’s LAN port or from your computer.
2 Re-connect the Ethernet cable.
The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen.
Restart your computer.
299
P ART III
Appendices
Appendices contain general information. Some information may not apply to your device.
300
301
A PPENDIX A
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you
bought the device.
See http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also
http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.
Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.cn
India
• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.in
Kazakhstan
• ZyXEL Kazakhstan
302
Appendix A Customer Support
• http://www.zyxel.kz
Korea
• ZyXEL Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• ZyXEL Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• http://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand
• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.co.th
Vietnam
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Austria
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
303
Belarus
• ZyXEL BY
• http://www.zyxel.by
Belgium
• ZyXEL Communications B.V.
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/
Bulgaria
• ZyXEL България
• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o
• http://www.zyxel.cz
Denmark
• ZyXEL Communications A/S
• http://www.zyxel.dk
Estonia
• ZyXEL Estonia
• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.fi
France
• ZyXEL France
• http://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Hungary
• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE
• http://www.zyxel.hu
304
Italy
• ZyXEL Communications Italy
• http://www.zyxel.it/
Latvia
• ZyXEL Latvia
• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml
Lithuania
• ZyXEL Lithuania
• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml
Netherlands
• ZyXEL Benelux
• http://www.zyxel.nl
Norway
• http://www.zyxel.no
Poland
• ZyXEL Communications Poland
• http://www.zyxel.pl
Romania
• ZyXEL Romania
• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• ZyXEL Russia
• http://www.zyxel.ru
Slovakia
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• http://www.zyxel.sk
Spain
• ZyXEL Communications ES Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.es
Sweden
305
• http://www.zyxel.se
Switzerland
• Studerus AG
• http://www.zyxel.ch/
Turkey
• ZyXEL Turkey A.S.
• http://www.zyxel.com.tr
UK
• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.uk
Ukraine
• ZyXEL Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
Latin America
Argentina
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Brazil
• ZyXEL Communications Brasil Ltda.
• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Ecuador
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Middle East
Israel
• http://il.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
Middle East
306
• http://www.zyxel.com/me/en/
North America
USA
• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• http://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
Oceania
Australia
• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.za
307
A PPENDIX B
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies

This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration

The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an
ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example
of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 182 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a
wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is
disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
308
Appendix B Wireless LANs
Figure 183 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access
point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection
between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only
provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the
immediate neighborhood.
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated
wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
309
Figure 184 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing
interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For
example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to
select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are
within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they
cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
310
Figure 185 RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of
data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest
size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for
permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other
stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms
with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and
the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be
fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes)
that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data
frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while
you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you
set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames
will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
311
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b
adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or
lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the
maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 143 IEEE 802.11g

DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION
1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11 CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/ OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
54
Wireless Security Overview

Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless
clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the VMG are data encryption, wireless client authentication,
restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the VMG identity.
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on
your VMG.
Table 144 Wireless Security Levels

SECURITY SECURITY TYPE
LEVEL
Least Unique SSID (Default)
Secure
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Most Secure
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the VMG and on all wireless
clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It
is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x
are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
312
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the
network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages

The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the
313
shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication

This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE
802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP
to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a
RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that
supports IEEE 802.1x.
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain
the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used
to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)

MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves’ that it knows the password by
encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in
plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get
the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You
must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)

With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for
mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of
the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done
in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive
attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which
imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)

EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-
side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending
username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client
authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
314
PEAP (Protected EAP)

Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then
use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the
clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5,
EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange

The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the
wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is
generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless
security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while
dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic
keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public
deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a
comparison of the features of authentication types.
Table 145 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types

EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP LEAP
Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Certificate – Client No Yes Optional Optional No
Certificate – Server No Yes Yes Yes No
Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate
Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate
Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No
WPA and WPA2

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a
wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management
than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use
WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use
315
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into
each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless
client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on
whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity
Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but
offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter
mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm
called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless
clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets,
altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the
receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is
assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force
password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent,
single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal
encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate
wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange
messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a
network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and
316
pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication
with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not
need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an
AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants

A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless
client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch
for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero
Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example

To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
1 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2 The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies
network access accordingly.
3 A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS
server and the client.
4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The
keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and
the wireless clients.
317
Figure 186 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example

A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must
consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and
symbols).
2 The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password
matches.
3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not
sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information
exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 187 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
318
Security Parameters Summary

Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on
how you configure these security features.
Table 146 Wireless Security Relational Matrix

AUTHENTICATION ENCRYPTIO ENTER
METHOD/ KEY IEEE 802.1X
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL N METHOD MANUAL KEY
Open None No Disable

Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Disable
Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Disable
WPA TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
WPA2 TKIP/AES No Enable
WPA2-PSK TKIP/AES Yes Disable
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to
the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by
capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a)
is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width.
Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately
319
2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of
approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal
power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna
that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the
antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN

There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The
coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room
environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage
areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light
from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles
typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional
antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In
point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to
each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For
omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP
application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
320
A PPENDIX C
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can

be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length

example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 147 Link-local Unicast Address Format

1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID
10 bits 54 bits 64 bits
321
Appendix C IPv6
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
Table 148 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION

FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 All DHCP severs on a local site.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 149 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
322
Appendix C IPv6
Table 149 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-
byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
MAC 00 : 13 : 49 : 12 : 34 : 56
EUI-64 02 : 13 : 49 : FF : FE : 12 : 34 : 56
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
323
Appendix C IPv6
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
T2
T1
Renew Renew Renew

Rebind
to S1 to S1 to S1
to S2
Renew Renew Renew Rebind
to S1 to S1 to S1 to S2
DHCP Relay Agent

A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-
known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string,
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The VMG uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example,
2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs)
regularly by multicast, the VMG passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then
can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

The Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track
neighbor’s reachability in a network. An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types:
• Neighbor solicitation: A request from a host to determine a neighbor’s link-layer address (MAC
address) and detect if the neighbor is still reachable. A neighbor being “reachable” means it
responds to a neighbor solicitation message (from the host) with a neighbor advertisement
message.
324
Appendix C IPv6
• Neighbor advertisement: A response from a node to announce its link-layer address.

• Router solicitation: A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and
forward packets.
• Router advertisement: A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement
from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters.
IPv6 Cache
An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache, destination cache, prefix list and default router
list. The VMG maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from
response messages. In IPv6, the VMG configures a link-local address automatically, and then sends
a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique. If there is an address to be
resolved or verified, the VMG also sends out a neighbor solicitation message. When the VMG
receives a neighbor advertisement in response, it stores the neighbor’s link-layer address in the
neighbor cache. When the VMG uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and
receives a router advertisement message, it adds the router’s information to the neighbor cache,
prefix list and destination cache. The VMG creates an entry in the default router list cache if the
router can be used as a default router.
When the VMG needs to send a packet, it first consults the destination cache to determine the next
hop. If there is no matching entry in the destination cache, the VMG uses the prefix list to
determine whether the destination address is on-link and can be reached directly without passing
through a router. If the address is unlink, the address is considered as the next hop. Otherwise, the
VMG determines the next-hop from the default router list or routing table. Once the next hop IP
address is known, the VMG looks into the neighbor cache to get the link-layer address and sends
the packet when the neighbor is reachable. If the VMG cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache
or the state for the neighbor is not reachable, it starts the address resolution process. This helps
reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages.
Multicast Listener Discovery

The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave
a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then
sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if
other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
325
Appendix C IPv6
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista

By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.46
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : 10.1.1.254
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP

Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
2 After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client
Install as service.
3 Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
326
Appendix C IPv6
5 Click Start and then OK.
6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7

Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
1 Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
2 Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
3 Click OK to save the change.
327
Appendix C IPv6
4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
5 Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 2001:b021:2d::1000
Link-local IPv6 Address . . . . . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
IPv4 Address. . . . . . . . . . . : 172.16.100.61
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
328
A PPENDIX D
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
329
Appendix D Services
Table 150 Examples of Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION

AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling
protocol uses this service.
AIM TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP/UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White
Pines Software.
TCP/UDP 24032
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that matches web
names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP
numbers.
ESP User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol)
(IPSEC_TUNNEL) tunneling protocol uses this service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that
can be used to find out if a user is logged on.
FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast
transfer of files, including large files that may not
TCP 21 be possible by e-mail.
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server
protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-
commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for
diagnostic purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when
sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for
key distribution and management.
IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-
mail.
IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs
over SSL.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this
protocol.
NetBIOS TCP/UDP 137 The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for
communication between computers in a LAN.
TCP/UDP 138
TCP/UDP 139
TCP/UDP 445
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
330
Appendix D Services
Table 150 Examples of Services (continued)

NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/server
distributed file service that provides transparent file
sharing for network environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery
mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out
ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote
host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer
get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary
connection (TCP/IP or other).
POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs
over SSL.
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure
transfer of data over public networks. This is the
control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables
secure transfer of data over public networks. This is
the data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time
sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for
cable modems.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol
(RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the
Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of
transferring files between computers.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-
exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables
you to move messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs
over SSL.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to
access data on many different types of database
systems, including mainframes, midrange systems,
UNIX systems and network servers.
SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
331
Appendix D Services
Table 150 Examples of Services (continued)

SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX
server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access
Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol
common on the Internet and in UNIX
environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks.
Its primary function is to allow users to log into
remote host systems.
VDOLIVE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number
is specified in the application.
UDP user-
defined
332
A PPENDIX E
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2016 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into
any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it
convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any
products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Regulatory Notice and Statement
UNITED STATES of AMERICA
The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.
FCC EMC Statement

• The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
• If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
•Increase the separation between the devices
•Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receiver’s
•Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

• This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
CANADA
The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area
Industry Canada ICES statement

ICAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)
333
Appendix E Legal Information
Industry Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 statement

• This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
• This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum
permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a
gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz , the following attention must be paid,
• The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-
channel mobile satellite systems.
• For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such
that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate;
and
• The worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2(3) of
RSS 247 shall be clearly indicated.
If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz , the following attention must be paid.
• For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-
5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit
• Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
• Le présent émetteur radio de modèle s'il fait partie du matériel de catégorieI) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner
avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type
d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement
interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est activée pour ce produit , il est nécessaire de porter
une attention particulière aux choses suivantes
• Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont réservés uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur afin de réduire
les risques de brouillage préjudiciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mêmes canaux;
• Pour les dispositifs munis d’antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 à 5
850 MHz) doit être conforme à la limite de la p.i.r.e. spécifiée pour l'exploitation point à point et l’exploitation non point à point, selon
le cas;
• Les pires angles d’inclinaison nécessaires pour rester conforme à l’exigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque d’élévation, et énoncée
à la section 6.2.2 3) du CNR-247, doivent être clairement indiqués.
Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est activée pour ce produit , il est nécessaire de
porter une attention particulière aux choses suivantes
• Pour les dispositifs munis d’antennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 à
5 350 MHz et de 5 470 à 5 725 MHz doit être conforme à la limite de la p.i.r.e.
Industry Canada radiation exposure statement

This device complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations:

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
EUROPEAN UNION
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)

Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 1999/
5/EC (R&TTE)
Български С настоящото ZyXEL декларира, че това оборудване е в съответствие със съществените изисквания и другите
(Bulgarian) приложими разпоредбите на Директива 1999/5/ЕC.
Español Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
(Spanish) disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Čeština ZyXEL tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
(Czech) směrnice 1999/5/EC.
Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede ZyXEL erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
334
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
(German) und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet.
Eesti keel Käesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
(Estonian) tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
Ελληνικά ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ ZyXEL ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ εξοπλισμός ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ
(Greek) ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕC.
English Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions
of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Français Par la présente ZyXEL déclare que l'appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
(French) dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC.
Hrvatski ZyXEL ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 1999/5/EC.
(Croatian)
Íslenska Hér með lýsir, ZyXEL því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði tilskipunar
(Icelandic) 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
(Italian) pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviešu valoda Ar šo ZyXEL deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
(Latvian) noteikumiem.
Lietuvių kalba Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
(Lithuanian)
Magyar Alulírott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EK
(Hungarian) irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li
hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
(Dutch) relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
Polski (Polish) Niniejszym ZyXEL oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português ZyXEL declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
(Portuguese) 1999/5/EC.
Română Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi
(Romanian) relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.
Slovenčina ZyXEL týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC.
(Slovak)
Slovenščina ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/EC.
(Slovene)
Suomi ZyXEL vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
(Finnish) direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska Härmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
(Swedish) relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Norsk Erklærer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante
(Norwegian) bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF.
This device is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5350 MHz frequency range.
National Restrictions
This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for
the countries mentioned below:
Ce produit peut être utilisé dans tous les pays de l’UE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposés la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune
limitation, excepté pour les pays mentionnés ci-dessous:
Questo prodotto è utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttiva 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione,
eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschränkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der Richtlinie 1999/5/CE
folgen) mit Außnahme der folgenden aufgeführten Staaten:
In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless
local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements
or both are applicable.
The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their
national regulations for both the 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless LANs.
The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled “Overview of Regulatory
Requirements for Wireless LANs”:.
Belgium
335
The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range
exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.
Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch
Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens.
Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à l’Institut Belge des
services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples détails.
Denmark
In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage.
I Danmark må frekvensbåndet 5150 - 5350 også anvendes udendørs.
Italy
This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless
this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a “general authorization.” Please
check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.
Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in
Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una “Autorizzazione Generale”.
Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.
Latvia
The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://
www.esd.lv for more details.
2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk informâcijas: http://
www.esd.lv.
Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in
those countries.
2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding
the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).
List of national codes
COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria AT Liechtenstein LI
Belgium BE Lithuania LT
Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU
Croatia HR Malta MT
Cyprus CY Netherlands NL
Czech Republic CZ Norway NO
Denmark DK Poland PL
Estonia EE Portugal PT
Finland FI Romania RO
France FR Serbia RS
Germany DE Slovakia SK
Greece GR Slovenia SI
Hungary HU Spain ES
Iceland IS Switzerland CH
Ireland IE Sweden SE
Italy IT Turkey TR
Latvia LV United Kingdom GB
Safety Warnings
• Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do not store things on the device.
• Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting
it to a power outlet.
336
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor
or cord.
• Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example,
110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it
from the device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose
them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of
this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power
supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,
• For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;
• For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible.
Environment Statement
ErP (Energy-related Products)
ZyXEL products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published Directive
2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called
as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures,
power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:
Network standby power consumption < 12W, and/or
Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or
Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.
Wireless setting, please refer to "Wireless" chapter for more detail.
European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information

The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic
waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate
collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development.
Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll
entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum
Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu
sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.
El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la
doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el
producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y
medioambiental.
Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des
ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la
collecte séparée de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la
santé humaine.
Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti
domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello
smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente
e la salute umana.
Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här
produkten når slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och
mänsklig hälsa genom att göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.
337
Environmental Product Declaration
338
台灣
以下訊息僅適用於產品具有無線功能且銷售至台灣地區
第十二條經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司，商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
無線資訊傳輸設備忍受合法通信之干擾且不得干擾合法通信；如造成干擾，應立即停用，俟無干擾之虞，始得繼續使用。
無線資訊傳設備的製造廠商應確保頻率穩定性，如依製造廠商使用手冊上所述正常操作，發射的信號應維持於操作頻帶中
以下訊息僅適用於產品操作於 5.25-5.35 秭赫頻帶內並銷售至台灣地區

• 在 5.25-5.35 秭赫頻帶內操作之無線資訊傳輸設備，限於室內使用。
以下訊息僅適用於產品屬於專業安裝並銷售至台灣地區
• 本器材須經專業工程人員安裝及設定，始得設置使用，且不得直接販售給一般消費者
安全警告
為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :
• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。
• 避免設備接觸任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。
• 灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。
• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。
• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。
• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。
• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。
• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。
• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。
• 請勿將設備解體。
• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。
• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC，歐洲是 230V AC)。
• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。
• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買一個新的電源變壓器。
• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。
• 請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。
• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。
• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。
• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分，以下警語將適用 :
－對永久連接之設備，在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；
－對插接式之設備，插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty

ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific
period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the
authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of
purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or
replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to
restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally
equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has
been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought
the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
339
Open Source Licenses

This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are
provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under
those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it.
340
Index
Index
A BSS 111, 308

example 111
ACK message 238 BYE request 238
ACL rule 199
activation
firewalls 195 C
media server 193
SIP ALG 169 CA 210, 314
SSID 96
call history 233
Address Resolution Protocol 256
call hold 244, 245
administrator password 24
call service mode 243, 245
antenna
call transfer 244, 246
directional 320
call waiting 244, 245
gain 319
omni-directional 320 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
AP (access point) 310 CCMs 288
applications certificate
Internet access 18 factory default 211
media server 192 Certificate Authority
activation 193 See CA.
iTunes server 192 certificates 210
applications, NAT 173 authentication 210
ARP Table 256, 258 CA
creating 211
authentication 108, 109
public key 210
RADIUS server 109
replacing 211
Authentication method
storage space 211
CHAP 70
Certification Authority 210
MSCHAP 70
PAP 70 Certification Authority. see CA
certifications 336
viewing 339
CFI 88
B CFM 288
CCMs 288
backup
link trace test 288
configuration 285
loopback test 288
Basic Service Set, See BSS 308 MA 288
Basic Service Set, see BSS MD 288
blinking LEDs 20 MEP 288
Broadband 62 MIP 288
broadcast 88 channel 310
interference 310
341
Index
channel, wireless LAN 107 digital IDs 210

CHAP 70 disclaimer 333
Class of Service 242 DLNA 192
Class of Service, see CoS DMZ 168
client list 126 DNS 121, 133
client-server protocol 235 DNS server address assignment 88
comfort noise generation 240 Domain Name 174
compatibility, WDS 102 Domain Name System, see DNS
configuration Domain Name System. See DNS.
backup 285 DoS 195
firewalls 195 DS field 156, 242
reset 286
DS, dee differentiated services
restoring 286
DSCP 156, 242
static route 84, 137, 138, 177
dynamic DNS 176
Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs
wildcard 176
contact information 302
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
copyright 333
dynamic WEP key exchange 315
CoS 156, 242
DYNDNS wildcard 176
CoS technologies 143
creating certificates 211
CTS (Clear to Send) 311
CTS threshold 104, 108 E
customer support 302
EAP Authentication 314
ECHO 174
echo cancellation 240
D e-mail
log example 280
data fragment threshold 104, 108
Encapsulation 84
DDoS 195 MER 85
default server address 168 PPP over Ethernet 85
Denials of Service, see DoS encapsulation
DHCP 121, 133 RFC 1483 85
DHCP option 43 71 encryption 110, 316
DHCP option 60 71 ESS 309
DHCP option 61 Europe type call service mode 243
DUID 71 Extended Service Set IDentification 92, 97
IAD 71 Extended Service Set, See ESS 309
differentiated services 242
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 156
DiffServ 156
marking rule 156
F
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) 242
Fast Leave 181
code points 242
marking rule 242 file sharing 19
filters
342
Index
MAC address 98, 109 ILA 172

Finger 174 Independent Basic Service Set
firewalls 194 See IBSS 308
add protocols 196 initialization vector (IV) 316
configuration 195 Inside Global Address, see IGA
DDoS 195 Inside Local Address, see ILA
DoS 195
interface group 184
LAND attack 195
Internet
Ping of Death 195
wizard setup 31
SYN attack 195
Internet access 18
firmware 282
wizard setup 31
version 59
Internet Protocol version 6 64
flash key 243
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
flashing 243
Intra LAN Multicast 181
forwarding ports 161
IP address 121, 134
fragmentation threshold 104, 108, 311
ping 289
FTP 161, 174
private 134
WAN 63
IP Address Assignment 87
G IP alias
NAT applications 174
G.168 240 IPv6 64, 321
General wireless LAN screen 91 addressing 64, 89, 321
EUI-64 323
global address 322
interface ID 323
H link-local address 321
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 321
hidden node 310 ping 321
HTTP 174 prefix 64, 89, 321
prefix delegation 66
prefix length 64, 89, 321
unspecified address 322
I iTunes server 192
ITU-T 240
IBSS 308
ICMPv6 179
IEEE 802.11g 312
IEEE 802.1Q 88
K
IGA 172
key combinations 246
IGMP 88
keypad 246
multicast group list 179, 260
version 88
IGMP Fast Leave 179
IGMPv2 179
IGMPv3 179
343
Index
L media server 192

activation 193
iTunes server 192
LAN 120
client list 126 MEP 288
DHCP 121, 133 MLD 179
DNS 121, 133 MLDv1 179
IP address 121, 122, 134 MLDv2 179
MAC address 126
MSCHAP 70
status 60
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 87
subnet mask 121, 122, 134
multicast 88
LAN to LAN multicast 181
Multicast Listener Discovery, see MLD
LAND attack 195
multimedia 234
LBR 288
Multiple BSS, see MBSSID
limitations
wireless LAN 110 multiplexing 85
WPS 118 LLC-based 86
VC-based 85
link trace 288
multiprotocol encapsulation 85
Link Trace Message, see LTM
Link Trace Response, see LTR
listening port 227
login 23 N
passwords 23, 24
logs 248, 251, 260, 265, 279 NAT 160, 161, 162, 172
applications 173
Loop Back Response, see LBR
IP alias 174
loopback 288
example 173
LTM 288 global 172
LTR 288 IGA 172
ILA 172
inside 172
local 172
M outside 172
port forwarding 161
MA 288 port number 174
MAC address 99, 126 services 174
filter 98, 109 SIP ALG 168
MAC authentication 98 activation 169
Mac filter 202 NAT example 175
Maintenance Association, see MA Network Address Translation, see NAT
Maintenance Domain, see MD Network Map 57
Maintenance End Point, see MEP network map 26
Management Information Base (MIB) 273 NNTP 174
managing the device non-proxy calls 232
good habits 17
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 86
MBSSID 111
MD 288
344
Index
O versus CoS 143

Quality of Service, see QoS
OK response 238, 239
R
P
RADIUS 313
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 316, 318 message types 313
messages 313
PAP 70
shared secret key 313
passwords 23, 24
RADIUS server 109
PBC 113
Real time Transport Protocol, see RTP
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 86
reset 21, 286
peer-to-peer calls 232
restart 287
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 156
restoring configuration 286
PHB 156, 242
RFC 1058. See RIP.
phone book
RFC 1389. See RIP.
speed dial 232
RFC 1483 85
phone functions 246
RFC 1889 237
PIN, WPS 113
example 115 RFC 3164 248
Ping of Death 195 RIP 141
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol, see PPTP router features 18
POP3 174 Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
port forwarding 161 RTP 237
ports 20 RTS (Request To Send) 311

threshold 310, 311
PPPoE 85
Benefits 85 RTS threshold 104, 108
PPTP 174
preamble 105, 108
preamble mode 112 S
prefix delegation 66
private IP address 134 security
PSK 316 wireless LAN 108
push button 21 Security Log 249
Push Button Configuration, see PBC Security Parameter Index, see SPI
push button, WPS 113 service access control 270, 271

Service Set 92, 97
Services 174
Session Initiation Protocol, see SIP
Q
setup
firewalls 195
QoS 142, 156, 242
static route 84, 137, 138, 177
marking 143
silence suppression 240
setup 142
tagging 143 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
345
Index
Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM supplementary services 242
SIP 234 Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 86
account 234 SYN attack 195
call progression 238 syslog
client 235 protocol 248
identities 234 severity levels 248
INVITE request 238, 239
system
number 235
firmware 282
OK response 239
version 59
proxy server 236
passwords 23, 24
redirect server 236
reset 21
register server 237
status 57
servers 235
LAN 60
service domain 235
WAN 59
URI 234
wireless LAN 60
user agent 236
time 275
SIP ALG 168
activation 169
SMTP 174
SNMP 174, 273, 274 T
agents 273
Get 274 Tag Control Information See TCI
GetNext 274 Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
Manager 273 TCI
managers 273 The 63
MIB 273
three-way conference 245, 246
network components 273
thresholds
Set 274
data fragment 104, 108
Trap 274
RTS/CTS 104, 108
versions 273
time 275
SNMP trap 174
ToS 242
speed dial 232
TPID 88
SPI 195
traffic shaping 86
srTCM 158
trTCM 159
SSID 109
activation 96 Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM
MBSSID 111 Type of Service, see ToS
static route 136, 141, 277
configuration 84, 137, 138, 177
example 136
U
static VLAN
status 57 unicast 88
firmware version 59
Uniform Resource Identifier 234
LAN 60
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
WAN 59
wireless LAN 60 upgrading firmware 282
status indicators 20 UPnP 127
cautions 122
subnet mask 121, 134
346
Index
NAT traversal 121 Wi-Fi Protected Access 315

USA type call service mode 245 wireless client WPA supplicants 317
USB features 19 Wireless Distribution System, see WDS
wireless LAN 90, 106
authentication 108, 109
BSS 111
V example 111
channel 107
VAD 240 encryption 110
Vendor ID 131 example 107
VID fragmentation threshold 104, 108
Virtual Circuit (VC) 85 limitations 110
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN MAC address filter 98, 109
MBSSID 111
VLAN 87
preamble 105, 108
Introduction 87
RADIUS server 109
number of possible VIDs
RTS/CTS threshold 104, 108
priority frame
security 108
static
SSID 109
VLAN ID 88
activation 96
VLAN Identifier See VID status 60
VLAN tag 88 WDS 102, 112
voice activity detection 240 compatibility 102
voice coding 240 example 112
WEP 110
VoIP 234
WPA 110
peer-to-peer calls 232
WPA-PSK 110
VoIP status 254
WPS 112, 115
example 116
limitations 118
W PIN 113
push button 21, 113
Wake on LAN 131 wireless security 312
WAN Wireless tutorial 37
status 59 wizard setup
Wide Area Network, see WAN 62 Internet 31
warranty 339 WLAN
note 339 interference 310
WDS 102, 112 security parameters 319
compatibility 102 WPA 110, 315
example 112 key caching 317
web configurator 23 pre-authentication 317
login 23 user authentication 316
passwords 23, 24 vs WPA-PSK 316
wireless client supplicant 317
WEP 110
with RADIUS application example 317
WEP Encryption 94, 95
WPA2 315
WEP encryption 93
user authentication 316
WEP key 93
347
Index
vs WPA2-PSK 316
wireless client supplicant 317
with RADIUS application example 317
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 316
WPA2-PSK 316
application example 318
WPA-PSK 110, 316
application example 318
WPS 112, 115
example 116
limitations 118
PIN 113
example 115
push button 21, 113
348

VMG5313-B10B V5.11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VMG5313-B10B V5.11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VMG5313-B10B V5.11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VMG5313-BXB Series

Wireless N VDSL2 IAD with USB

Quick Start Guide

Default Login Details

Copyright © 2016 ZyXEL Communications Corporation

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.

KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................15

Introducing the VMG ...............................................................................................................................17

Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................55

Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................57

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................277

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3

Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5

Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 15

1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................17

2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................23

3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31

4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................33

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

4.3.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................37

Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 55

5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................57

6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................62

7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................90

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

7.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................93

8.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................120

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................136

10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................142

11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................160

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

11.8 The Sessions Screen ....................................................................................................................171

12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................176

13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................179

14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................182

15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................184

16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................189

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

16.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................190

17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................194

18.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................202

19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................204

20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................208

21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................210

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

21.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................215

22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................217

23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................248

24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................251

25.1 The VoIP Status Screen ................................................................................................................254

VMG5313-BXB Series User’s Guide

26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................256

27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................258

28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................260